This is volume 2 of a 2 volume edition. Volume 1 can also be read at
Project Gutenberg.
Each volume contains additional matter unique to that volume but
pertinent to both.
Please note that while this is not a fascsimile of the published
volume, it remains a "warts and all" version in accordance with the
printer’s note in volume 1:
“Typographic peculiarities have been
followed, even to the copying of gross faults, like doublets, that
will be readily corrected by the reader. The object of the reprint is
not merely to present the thought of the author, but to illustrate the
typographic style of his time with its usual defects.”
MOXON'S MECHANICK EXERCISES
Or, the Doctrine of
Handy-works.
Applied to the Art of
Printing.
The Second VOLUMNE.
By Joseph Moxon, Member of the Royal
Society, and Hydrographer to the King’s
Most Excellent Majesty.
LONDON.
Printed for Joseph Moxon on the West-side
of Fleet-ditch, at the Sign of Atlas. 1683.
The Compositers Trade. — PREFACE. — §. 22. ¶. 1. Of Papering and Laying the CASE. — ¶. 2. Of Rincing a Form of Letter, in order to Destributing it . — ¶ 3. Of Destributing. — ¶ 4. Of Composing. — ¶ 5. Some Circumstances a good Compositer considers and observes in Composing. — ¶ 6. Of Tying up a Page. — ¶ 7. Of Imposing. — ¶ 8. Of Correcting. — ¶ 9. Of Counting or Casting off Copy. — ¶ 10. Of Papering up of Pages. — §. 23. Of the Correcter, and his Office .
In a strict sence, a good Compositer need be no
more than an English Scholler, or indeed scarce
so much; for if he knows but his Letters and
Characters he shall meet with in his Printed or
Written Copy, and have otherwise a good natural
capacity, he may be a better Compositer than another
Man whose Education has adorn’d him with Latin,
Greek, Hebrew, and other Languages, and shall want
a good natural Genius: For by the Laws of Printing, a
Compositer is strictly to follow his Copy, viz. to observe
and do just so much and no more than his Copy will bear
him out for; so that his Copy is to be his Rule and Authority:
But the carelesness of some good Authors, and
the ignorance of other Authors, has forc’d Printers to introduce
a Custom, which among them is look’d upon as a
task and duty incumbent on the Compositer, viz. to
discern and amend the bad Spelling and Pointing of his
Copy, if it be English; But if it be in any Forrain
Language, the Author is wholy left to his own Skill and
Judgement in Spelling and Pointing, &c. his Copy,
and Correcting the Prooves, unless they be Latine,
Greek or Hebrew, for to those Languages there is generally
a Corrector belongs to the Printing-House: And
how well other Forrain Languages are Corrected by the
Author, we may perceive by the English that is Printed
in Forrain Countries.
Therefore upon consideration of these accidental circumstances
that attend Copy, it is necessary that a Compositer
be a good English Schollar at least; and that he
know the present traditional Spelling of all English
Words, and that he have so much Sence and Reason, as
to Point his Sentences properly: when to begin a Word
with a Capital Letter, when (to render the Sence of the
Author more intelligent to the Reader) to Set some
Words or Sentences in Italick or English Letters, &c.
But of this more at large in ¶. 6.
Thus much of his qualifications: Now to his Taask.
The Master-Printer gives him his Copy, and directs
him to his standing Place or Case, and orders him Letter
to Work withal.
If his Case want Papering, as all New Cases do,
and many times old, He must Paper his Case.
The Composster sends the Boy to the Master-Printer,
or to him that attends the Warehouse,
for Half a Quire, or a Quire, or so much as he guesses
he shall want, of good strong Wast-Paper, and cuts it
into so many several Scantlins as the number of each
Scantlin of his Boxes in his Case are; but he cuts his
Papers so large, as each Paper may ly double in its
Box, and have enough besides to fold almost half
way towards the middle of each Paper, and also enough
to turn up again against the sides of each Box,
about the thickness of a Pica, or an English, above
the bottom of the Box; and its Paper on all its sides,
except the upper side of the Box, which, as near as
he can, he leaves no turning up of Paper to, because
the tendency the whole Case has downwards by its
a-slope position, the Letter in each Box tends also
downwards, and therefore is not so apt to get between
the Paper and that side of the Box, as between
the Paper and the other sides of each Box: But yet
that upper side, and all the other sides of the Box,
he Papers so smooth and tight, that he leaves no
wrinckles in the turnings up against the sides of the
Box; but if there be any, drives them carefully into
the corners of the Box, lest his Letter, especially if
it be Small, should get into the openings of those
Wrinckles, and in time work their way under the
Paper.
Having Paper’d his Case, he considers how the rest
of the Cases in that House ly, viz. into what Boxes
the several Letters are to be disposed; for they are
not in every Printing-House disposed alike, and accordingly
he applies himself to fill his Case with
Letter.
If a Fount of New Letter be brought home from
the Founders, the Compositer has no more to do, but
to fill each Box in his Case with so many of each sort
as each Box will hold, and fall to Composing till he has
emptied his Case; which the same way he fills again,
and Composes on again till the whole Fount be Set up:
But when he has no longer any New Letter to work
upon, he must Destribute some former Set Forms to
fill his Case withal.
And before I shew you the Rules and Method of
Destributing and Composing, it will be necessary I say
somewhat of the Case, and Laying it.
By the Case is meant, in Printers common diolect,
a Pair of Cases, viz. the Upper and the Lower-Case:
They are described with the most common way of
Laying them, in Plate 2. A the Upper Case, B the
Lower Case. The Upper Case is devided into Ninety
eight Boxes all of equal size; but the Lower Case is
devided into but Fifty six Boxes, and those of four
different sizes (as you may see in the Figure) by the
Frame and Black streight Lines representing the several
Partitions. The manner how the several sorts of
Letters are disposed in the several Boxes, is called,
Laying of the Case, where in the Upper Case you see
Capital A Ly in the uppermost Box on the Left-hand,
B C D E F G succeeding it in that Row to the Right
hand, as far as the broad Partition in the middle of
the Case; under Capital A lies Capital H, I K L M N
O orderly succeeding it to the right hand, as far as
the great Partition in the middle of the Case: But
the Figure being plain, I refer you to it.
The Lower Case is not devided according to an orderly
succession of the Alphabet, in Ranks; for those
Letters that are most used are laid in the biggest Boxes,
about the middle of the Case, That the Compositers
hand may have the quicker access to them. See the
Figure.
After the Press-man has Wash’d a Form, he brings
it to the Rincing-Trough, and rears it a little a-slope
on one of the ends of the Chase, either against a
convenient place of the Frame of the Rincing-Trough,
or towards the Wall; for so plac’d, the Face of the Letter
runs less hazzard of receiving dammage, and
the Form stands in a proper position for the Compositer
to rear a Letter-board against the backside of it.
The Compositer therefore brings a Letter-board, and
puts the Face of it against the back-side of the Form,
and draws Form and Letter-board toward him, leaning
them against his Knee till he can conveniently
grasp about the middle of the sides of the Chase and
Letter-board between his Fingers under the Board,
and his Thumb upon the Chase and Furniture: And
if the Form be not too heavy, in this position he lifts
it up to the Rincing Trough; but if it be too heavy,
as most commonly it is, He lifts it up in this position
till he brings the upper edge of one of the long sides
of the Letter-board to rest between his Belly and
Stomach, and then sets Letter board Form and all in
the Rincing-Trough, letting the hither side of the Board
rest upon the hither Ledge of the Rincing-Trough; that
the Form may tilt downwards.
When it is on the Rincing Trough, he gets the Mallet
and Shooting-stick, and holding the Mallet in his
Right hand, and the Shooting-stick in his Left, he
places the Foot of the Shooting-stick (that is the thin
end of it) against the narrow ends of each Quoin,
and knocking with the Mallet upon the Head of the
Shooting-stick as gently as he can to drive them back,
he loosens every Quoin; and this is call’d Opening of
the Quoins, Unlocking of the Quoins, Opening of the
Form, and Unlocking of the Form.
But in the Unlocking of the Form, he observes these
three Circumstances:
First, He begins at the Foot-Quoins of a Quarter,
and loosens them; then with his Fingers and Thumb
he puts them up again pretty stiff; yet not so stiff,
but that he can again with his Fingers and Thumb
loosen them.
The Reason why he opens the Foot-Quoins first, is,
because the Letter is less subject to Squabble between
Line and Line (that is Head and Foot, the length of
the Page) than it is between side and side (the
breadth of the Page): For all the Letters of a Line
being of the same Body, are all of the same size
in their parallel bounds; and the two sides of the
Letter being generally considerably broader than the
Thickness of the Letter, are held by their breadth
and flatness faster and closer together in a motion
towards the Head or Foot of the Page, than they are
a-thwart the Lines, there being generally many thin
Letters and Spaces in a Line, whose thickness is very
little considerable to their Body or parallel bounds:
So that if the Form be loose, those Thin Letters and
Spaces not having a Thickness proportionable to their
Body to keep them in their proper Square, their Thin
Edges twist them about, and one Letter very seldom
twists alone, but forces many others (perhaps in
some Lines above and below it, and on each side of
it) out of its square position.
But the Foot-Quoin being thrust up again with the
Fingers, that the Lines may joyn again after they
were knock’d open with the Mallet and Shooting-stick,
make the Thin Letters in the Lines less subject to
Squabble (as not having the room to twist about)
because Opening the Foot-Quoins afterwards with the
Fingers, offers less violence than the smart knock of
a Mallet.
Secondly, He holds the Shooting-stick much aslant to
the Letter-board, so as the Foot of it touch not the
Face of the Letter-board, lest with knocking upon
the Shooting-stick (it being hard Wood, and the grain
running downwards) the Foot should batter and
spoil the Face of the Letter-board.
Thirdly, He Unlocks the outermost, viz. the broadest
Quoins first, and then with his Fingers thrusts
them pretty close up again, unless the Form he Unlock
be a great Letter, for then he observes not this
Circumstance so nicely; then the other Quoin, or
(according to the bigness of the Form) Quoins.
Having Unlock’d the Foot Quoins, he Unlocks the
Side Quoins in the same manner and order; and being
provided with a Pail, or a great Pan full of fair Water,
and a Wooden Dish; he takes a Dish full of fair Water,
or more, if the Form require it, and throws it upon
the Form, till he have so well wetted it, that the
Water may sink between the Letters in the Form, to
hold and keep every Letter contiguous to its next.
Then he Opens the Quoins pretty loose, the Foot
Quoins first, and in Opening them he considers the
Body of the Letter, whether it be Great or Small, and
accordingly he Opens them; for at the Foot he Opens
them about the thickness of the Body of the Letter:
But on the Sides not above half the Body.
By Opening, you must now understand removing
the Quoins, till they stand loose, or distant from the
Furniture, the Body, or half the Body of the Letter.
He Opens but one Quarter at a time, viz. one of
the hithermost Quarters, till he have well Rinc’d that,
which when he has done, with his Fingers he thrusts
the Quoins of that Quarter stiff up again, aswell that
it may be the less subject to Squabble or Break, as
that the Water may the better be squeezed out from
between the Letter; when he comes to Destribute it.
Having thus Opened the Quoins, He also Opens the
Furniture, viz. the Head sticks, and the Inner Side-sticks
and Gutter-sticks, if the Form have any, to make
himself the more room to Open the Letter: The Balls
of the three first Fingers of each Hand he places
near the ends of the Head-stick, and Opens it by taking
as good hold as he can of so much of it as stands
above the Cross of the Chase, drawing the Head-stick
towards him about half the Body of the Letter.
And in the like manner he Opens the inner Side-sticks,
but draws them towards him about a quarter of the
Body of the Letter. Yet sometimes this Office is
not perform’d with the three Fore-fingers of each
Hand, but with the two Thumbs; and this is when
the Quarter of Letter stands between the Head
or Side-sticks, and then he places his two Thumbs
near the ends of the Sticks, as before he did his Fingers,
and thrusts the Sticks, Letter and all, from
him.
And having Opened the Quoins and Furniture of
one Quarter, he also Opens the Letter, that it may
receive the Water more plentifully: He Opens the
Letter, by fixing the Balls of his Fingers of both
his Hands upon the Face, and so thrusting and joggling
it from him, and drawing it towards him from
Head to Foot, and from Side to Side, and then
throws a good Dish full or two of Water upon it,
and with the Balls of his Fingers still rubs upon the
Face of the Letter, that by shaking and joggling the
Letter, the Water (e’re it sink through the Letter)
may the better Rince away that Ly that by the Press-mans
washing soak’d into it: And this joggling the
Letter, and throwing on fresh Water he continues till
the Water that spurts out from between the Letters by
this joggling, be as clear as it was when it was thrown
on, and then, and not till then, he knows his Quarter
is well Rinc’d: Then with his two Thumbs, one
placed on the side of the Foot-stick and the other on
the side of the Side-stick, as near as he can, he thrusts
both at once towards their opposite Cross, and so
thrusts the Letter and Furniture close up again: And
that the Letter may not be in danger of Squabbling
or Breaking, he thrusts the Quoins loosly up again
also.
As he Open’d and Rinc’d this first Quarter, he Opens
and Rinces the others.
The reason why he Opens and Rinces the hithermost
Quarter first, is, because the Water that descends
from the hithermost Quarters does in a degree help
to Rince the nethermost also.
Having thus Rinced the whole Form, and with
his Fingers shut it up again, he lets it stand a little
while to drain; then grasping the two ends of the
Letter-board a little beyond the middle, with his
Fingers underneath, and the Thumb-balls of his two
Hands upon it, he sets one side of the Letter-board
against the bottom of his Stomach, and carries Letter-board,
Form, and all to the Destributing Frame.
Then he falls to Stripping of one Quarter first:
Taking the Quoins quite out, and laying them upon
the Face of the Letter, either on the same or another
Quarter (if he Strips but one Quarter at once) with
their ends standing the same way they stood in the
Chase, and in the same order of succession; then he
removes the Side and Foot-sticks to their respective
sides, close to the inside of the Chase, and again removes
the Quoins, laying them in the same order
he laid them upon the Face of the Letter, upon the
upper sides of the Side and Foot-sticks, and Chase;
then, as I told you before, how he Opened the Inner
Side-sticks, just so again he not only opens them,
but by the Side and Head-sticks he draws or slides
the Letter from the Crosses, that he easily takes them
out if he pleases; or if he have room enough to
come at the Letter without, he lets them stay in.
Thus the first Quarter is Stript, and so the other
Quarters successively, in order to be Destributed.
Plate 23.
The Compositer seeks among the Furniture for a
Riglet, a little longer (about a Pica or English)
than the Line of the Page he is to Destribute; or
else he cuts a Riglet to that length (this Riglet is
called a Destributing-stick) and coming to his Stript
Form, or Quarter of the Form he is to Destribute, he
places one flat side of the Riglet against the Head of
the Page, and claps the Balls of his two Fore-fingers
behind it, and the inner Joints (next his Fore-fingers)
of his middle Fingers he claps against the ends of so
many Lines as he intends to Take up, supposing it
Pica, about Seven; and presses them pretty close
to the sides of the Lines: Then with the ends of the
Balls of his two Thumbs he parts that number of
Lines from the rest of the Page, by pressing gently
towards his Riglet or Destributing-stick upon the
Face of the Letter of the farthest Line, which, if
the Joints of his middle Fingers press pretty hard
towards each other at first, easily part, and he may
open that number of Lines so far from the rest of
the Page, that he may get the Balls of his Thumbs
far enough upon the shank of the Letter: So that
the pressing the Lines yet a little harder between the
Joints of his middle Fingers, and pinching with his
Thumbs the Letter hard against the Riglet, with a
quick jerk he rears that Taking-up upon his Destributing-stick.
See Plate 23. at A.
Having it upon his Destributing-stick between both
his Hands, with the Face of the Letter from him, he
disingages his middle Fingers, and with his fore Fingers
and Thumbs holding the Riglet, and now the
Top of his Taking-up pretty loosly between them, he
turns (as on two moving Axises) the ends of the
Lines that were towards his Right Hand, and guides
them to the Thumb-ball of his Left Hand: Thus the
Face of the Letter is turn’d towards him; then bowing
the inner Joynt of the middle Finger of his Left
Hand (which before prest the left side of the Line)
under the middle of the Riglet he takes the weight
of the Taking-up upon it, which yet he eases as he lifts,
by mounting the now Right Hand end of the Lines
a little above an Horizontal level, and depressing
the Left Hand ends a little below; so that now he
he has his Taking up in his Hand, with the Face of
his Letter towards him, and the Notches upwards,
he goes with it to his Case, and places himself against
the middle of it. See Plate 23. at B.
Then clapping the Ball (or if he will take off
more than the length of the Ball) of his middle Finger
of his Right Hand, of the second Joint of that
Finger, against the bottom of the uppermost Line of
his Taking up towards his Right Hand, and his fore
Finger about the middle of the shank of the Letter,
he slides or draws towards him about an Inch or an
Inch and an half of that Line upon the Ball of his
Thumb, which is placed at the Face of the Letter to
receive it: And as it comes off the Taking up, he
with his aforesaid two Fingers and Thumb disposes
it so among his Fingers that he gathers the Ball of his
fourth Finger under the bottom of the Letter, and
then he brings what he has taken off towards his
Sight to read; then with a sleight thrusting the Ball
of his Thumb outwards, and drawing inwards the
Balls of his fore and middle Fingers, he spreads and
Squabbles the shanks of the Letters between his Fingers
askew; and remembring what Letters he read,
he nimbly addresses his Hand with a continued motion
to every respective Box, which his Fingers, as
they pass by, lets a Letter drop into, till his Taking
off be quite Destributed.
Having Destributed that Taking off he makes another
Taking off as before, and so continues his Takings
off till his whole Taking up be Distributed:
And thus he Takes up and Destributes till his Case is
full.
If the Form were not well Rinc’d, the shanks of
of the Letters will be more or less slippery, and
with long Destributing will make the Balls of the
Fingers and Thumb supple, by the wetness of the
Letter and sharpness of the Ly; and consequently the
grain of the skin will be made clumsie, and those
Joints feeble; so that they will not so well fasten
upon the sides of the Shank to command the Letter,
and draw it askew, or be so nimble at disposing
them into their several Boxes.
This happens most if they work upon small Letter,
and that old, and the Ly old too, for then the
Ly will have much Inck mingled in it: And the
Compositer will have much ado to Rince his Form so
clean but that the Letter will be slippery, and consequently
not spread, as aforesaid. But against it
they may use a remedy, which is, to have a piece
of Allom about the bigness of a Hasel-nut, lye in
one of the Boxes of the Case; for by feeling that now
and then, the dilated pores of their Fingers are again
contracted, and fit to do their office: For by the
greasiness of the Letter, the grain of the Skin of the
Fingers were so dilated, that the Compositer could not
so actively draw the Shanks of the Letters askew, as
aforesaid.
The Compositer, if conveniences suit, chuses to
Destribute his Letter over Night, that he may have
a dry Case (as he calls it) to work at in the Morning,
because Wet Letters are not so ready and pleasant to
pick up as Dry; and besides are apt to make the Fingers
sore, especially if the Ly be not so well Rinc’d
from the Letter as it should be. In the Winter, when
he Destributes in the Day time, he commonly brings
the Lower Case, when full of Letter, to the Fire to
dry, rearing the farther side of the Case a little upwards:
And when it is well dryed, he sets it again
upon the Frame.
Plate 24
The Compositer now addresses himself to Composing:
And looking a little over his Copy, to see how it
pleases him, for he runs different fortunes, either of
good or bad Copy, viz. well or ill writ, if it be a
Written Copy, or much Italick, Latin or Greek, or
Marginal Notes, or few Breaks, &c. for this he likes
not in his Copy: But a Printed Copy, or a fair Written
Hand, and full of Breaks pleases him well, and
is by Compositers call’d Good Copy, Light, Easie Work;
when the former they call Bad, Heavy, Hard Work:
And if a Price be already made for a whole Book,
the Good and Bad is done at the same Price.
If the Measure be already made, that is, if he was
already upon that Work before, and his Composing-stick
be set to the Measure of that Work, he needs
not, or must not alter his Composing-stick: But if his
Measure be not made, he must unskrew the Skrew
of his Composing-stick, and slide the Cheeks nearer to,
or farther off the Head of his Composing-stick, till he
have exactly fitted his given Measure.
If it be a Printed Copy he is to Work on, and
his Work must run Line for Line with his Copy,
he then without more ado, Sets or Composes the
fullest Line he finds in his Copy, and slides up the
Cheeks of his Composing-stick, and pinches that Line
between the Cheeks and the Head, till it stands
as stiff or hard in the Stick as he intends to
Justifie all the rest of his Lines: Then screws up
the Composing-stick.
Justifying (in Compositers Language) is the stiff or
loose filling of his Stick, for if it be fill’d very stiff
with Letters or Spaces, they say it is hard Justified,
if loosly, they say it is loose Justified.
Having the Measure fitted, he places the Galley on
his Upper Case on the Right Hand, for those Boxes
are seldomest used, because in them are placed only
the Latin sorts, or sometimes the Small Capitals,
Astronomical Signs, &c.
He places his Galley so, that the Left Hand corner
of the bottom of its Frame stands lower upon the
Case than any of the other Corners, for in that position
the Letters at the end of every Line stand safest
from falling, as leaning towards the rest of the Page.
Some Compositers use Visorums, as is described in
Plate 2. at i. Therefore pricking the point of the
Visorum most commonly upon the Border or Frame
of the Case on the Left Hand about the &-Box, they
fold the Leaf of Copy they Compose by, so as the bottom
of it may rest upon the Square-Shoulder near the
bottom of the Visorum; then with two pieces of Scaboard
tyed together at one end, they clasp both the
Copy and Visorum between these two Scaboards, which
two Scaboards pinch the Copy and Visorum fast enough
to keep the Copy in its place, and at the same time
also serves for an Index to direct the Eye to every
Line, as the Compositer moves it downward.
After this preparation, the Compositer falls to Composing.
But first reads so much of his Copy as he
thinks he can retain in his memory till he have
Composed it, as commonly is five or six words, or
sometimes a longer Sentence. And having read, he
falls a Spelling in his mind; yet so, that his Thoughts
run no faster than his Fingers: For as he spells A,
he takes up A out of the A Box, as he names n in
his thoughts, he takes up n out of the n Box, as he
names d in his thoughts he takes up d out of the d
Box; which three Letters set together make a Word,
viz. And; so that after the d he sets a Space: Then
he goes on to the next Word, and so Composes on,
Setting a Space after every Word till the Words come
to the end of the Line, for then he sets no Space.
When he Composes the Letters he holds the Composing-stick
in his Left Hand, placing the Second
Joynt of his Thumb over the moving Cheek of the
Stick, and the end of the Ball of his Thumb reaches
down to the bottom of the Cheek and Stick; so that
with the end of the Ball of his Thumb he gently
presses the Letter close to the Cheek, and keeps the
Letters tight and square together, as he places them
in the Stick successively. See Plate 24. at A.
And as his Eyes are very quick in reading his Copy,
and in shifting its Visual Ray to the several Boxes
he is to have a Letter out of, so is his choice what
Letter to take up very sudden; for though the Box
be full of Letters, yet in an instant he resolves and
pitches his Fingers upon that one, which for its posture
and position his Fancy reckons lyes most commodious
for his immediate seizing. For position, he
generally chuses that which lies uppermost, because
it is readiest at Hand to snatch up: And for posture,
that which lies with its Face towards his Right Hand,
because catching at the Letter near the Face-end of
the Shank, he by an accustomed sleight, in his Fingers
while it is coming to the Stick, disposes it so, that as
the bottom of the Shank goes directly forwards, towards
the bottom of the Stick, so the Notch of the
Letter shall also be placed upwards.
Most Compositers use a Composing-Rule, which is only
a piece of a Brass-Rule cut to the length of the Measure,
with a small Ear left at either end, to take it out
by when the Line is full, and to lay it upon the Compos’d
Line, to Set successively a succession of Lines
upon, till the Stick be full.
This Rule is very commodious to Work with,
because the Letter slides easier and smoother down
to the Back of the Stick, than it will upon a Line of
Letters: Besides, the Letters Compos’d on it stand
streighter and truer in Line, and are less subject to
Hang, than those Compos’d on a Line of Matter; unless
with a Riglet (as that they many times do) they
rub pretty strongly along the Line they have Compos’d,
which is a labour more than needs, and the
loss of some time to make the Work more unpleasant.
Having Composed one Line, if it ends with a Word
or a Syllable and a Division, and just fill the Measure,
it needs no more Justifying; but if the Line conclude
not as aforesaid, then he puts a Space more between
every Word, or so many Words as will fill up the
Measure pretty stiff, viz. Justifie the Line. But if the
Line be not yet Justified, he puts another Space
between every Word, or between several Words, till
the Line be Justified: So that here is now three
Spaces, and strictly, good Workmanship will not
allow more, unless the Measure be so short, that by
reason of few Words in a Line, necessity compells
him to put more Spaces between the Words. This
often happens in Marginal Notes, where the White
between Words is often as great or greater than between
Line and Line.
These wide Whites are by Compositers (in way of
Scandal) call’d Pidgeon-holes, and are by none accounted
good Workmanship, unless in such cases of
necessity, as aforesaid.
And as Lines may be too much Spaced-out, so
may they be too close Set: It maybe accounted too
close Set when only a Thin-space is set between
Words, especially if no Capital Letter follows the
Thin-space or Point go before it. Thin-spaces being
intended and Cast only that the Compositer may Justifie
his Lines the Truer, and not to serve for convenient
distinction between Words; yet do some Compositers
too often commit this error, rather than put
themselves to the trouble of Spacing out a Line,
where many Spaces must be used to Space it out.
A good Compositer takes care not to Set too Close,
or too Wide; for if he Set too Close, and should
happen to leave out a Word or two, it will give
him a great deal of trouble to get those Words in;
Nay perhaps when he comes to a Break he drives out
a Line, for which Line perchance he may be forc’d
to Over-run all the Pages that are Set forwards upon
that Matter. And if he Sets too Wide, and he
chance to Set a Word or two twice over, he may be
forc’d to make Pidgeon-holes e’re he come to a Break,
and then perhaps his Break is got in too, and his
Page a Line too short, and he forc’d to Over-run several
Pages e’re he can drive that Line out. As I shall
farther shew you when I come to the ¶ of Correcting.
In Justifying his Line he takes great care that it do
not Hang: It is an unproper Term, yet grown into
Use, for when the Letter stands askew, and not
directly Square, they say it Hangs. New Letter is
most subject to Hang, especially if not very smoothly
Drest; Because the least Bur, or sharpness of its
Angles, may catch in the Burs or Angles of the
Letters that stand next them, and so make them
stand aslope, and one Letter standing aslope is very
subject to make all the other Letters in that Line
stand aslope too. Therefore if he find his Letter
Hang, while his Line is yet loose, viz. Unjustified, he
gently with the Ball of the Thumb of his Left
Hand, thrusts the top of the shank of the Line
where it Hangs, moving the Letter somewhat from
him, towards the farther end of the Stick, and with
the Balls of the two Fore-fingers of his Right Hand
pats upon the Face of the Letter, till he have got
them into an upright position. He moves or
drives the top of the Shank of the Letter from him,
because generally the placing the Ball of his Thumb
on the top of the shank of the Letter when he Composes
(as was shewn before) is subject to draw the
Letter askew towards him, but that his care commonly
prevents it: Yet if by chance the Line should
Hang from him, then he with the Ball of his Thumb
as aforesaid, draws the Letter towards him, to set it
upright.
Here is now one Line Compos’d: And as he Compos’d
that Line, so he Composes Line upon Line till
his Stick be full: When his Stick is full, he Empties
thus; He lays his Stick down upon his Lower Case,
with the bottom of his Stick against the hither Ledge
of the Case, and the Face of the Letter upwards;
being provided of a Riglet just the Length of his
Line, he lays his Riglet against his last Line, and
places the Balls of his two Fore-fingers behind the
Riglet, near the middle of it, if the Line be not too
long, and then only as near the middle as he can to
command it with his Fore-fingers; and he places the
Balls of his Thumbs against the first Line in his Stick
as far below the Face of the Letter as he can, and he
places first the Joints of his middle-fingers against the
Sides of the Letter at the two ends of the Line, so as I
shewed you he did when he was Taking up his Letter
to Destribute it; and in this posture pinching the Letter
between his Thumbs and his Fore-fingers, and
and squeezing his two middle fingers towards each
other, he leans the Letter in the Stick almost flat
upon the Riglet: But if his Lines were Hard Justified,
he cannot perhaps with the first leaning the Letter
back get them clear out of the Stick, therefore
he again wriggles the Stick of Letter forwards and
backwards, till he gets them quite out. See Plate
24. at B.
Having gotten them out, and in this posture fast
between his Thumbs and Fingers, and the Letter
leaning almost flat upon his Riglet, he directs both
his hands together to his Galley, and nimbly claps
that Stick of Letter down into the Galley, placing the
first Line close and upright against the lower ledge of
the Galley, and the begining of his Lines close and
upright against the left hand Ledge of the Galley, and
then disingages his Fingers and Thumbs, and leaves
his Riglet standing in its place till he have occasion
to use it in like manner for the next Stick of Letter.
As he Set this Stick of Letter, so he Sets on till his
Page is Out, Remembring after the last Line of every
Page to set a Direction: That is, he Sets a Line of
Quadrats and at the end of it the first word of the
next Page, or if the Word be very long and the Line
very short, two Syllables, or sometimes but one of
that Word. And if it be the First Page, viz. the first
Page of that Sheet, he Sets a Signature about the
middle of the Line, or rather a small matter nearer
the end than the middle is, (because when the
Sheets are wrought off and gather’d, they Collation
something quicker: The Collationer not being forced
to prick up with his Bodkin the corners of the Sheet
so high to see the Signature: which in a long train of
work saves time.
If it be the First Page of the first Sheet of a Book the
Signature is A, if the first of the second Sheet B, if the
first of the third C, and so successively till he come
to W, which is always skipt, because the Latin
Alphabet has not that Letter in it; but next V follows
X Y Z, so that if the Book contain above three and
twenty Sheets, the Signature of the four and twentieth
Sheet must be A a, if five and twenty B b; till in like
manner he run through the Second Alphabet, and
comes to the third, fourth, &c. still as he begins a
new Alphabet adding an a.
To the second Page, or any other Even Page,
he Sets no Signature, but to the Third which is an
Odd Page he does, viz. A 2. The Figure of 2 is no
part of the Signature, but is only an adjunct to shew
the Book-binder the Second Leaf of that Sheet, that
he may the surer Fold the Sheet right.
If it be a Folio Sheet he cannot set A 3 in a single
Sheet, because it has but two Odd Pages in it; but if
they be Quir’d Sheets, that is, two, three, or four
Sheets Quir’d together, he must set A 3 in a Folio,
though not in the First, but Third Sheet of that
Quire. But no wise Compositer, except he work on
Printed Copy that runs Sheet for Sheet, will be willing
to Compose more Sheets to a Quire than he shall
have a Fount of Letter large enough to set out, unless
he will take upon him the trouble of Counting off his
Copy: because he cannot Impose till he has Set to the
last Page of that Quire; all the other Sheets being
Quired within the first Sheet, and the last Page of the
Quire comes in the first Sheet. But when he Composes
Quir’d Work, the Signature of the first Page is
A, the Signature of the Sheet Quir’d next within the
first Sheet is A 2, the first Page of the next Quir’d-Sheet
A 3: So that the Signatures of all the Sheets
in the first Quire is A, A 2, A 3, &c. according to
the number of Sheets Quired together. The second
Quire begins B, B 2, B 3, &c. The Third Sheet
C, &c. according to the number of Quires. This
is called Printing in Quires. Now to return.
If the Form be Quarto, he Sets under the Fifth
Page Signature 3. If Octavo, he sets also under the
Fifth Page Signature 3. and under the Seventh Page
Signature 4. If Twelves, he sets also under the Fifth
Page Signature 3, and under the Seventh Page Signature
4, and under the Ninth Page Signature 5, and
under the Eleventh Page Signature 6. The Rule is,
that all Odd Pages should have a Signature, if they
stand on the Out-side of the Sheet; and the reason
for the Rule is, that the Gatherer, Collater and Bookbinder
may the readier lay Sheets right, if they be
turned wrong. This Rule is not among Compositers
so well observed as it ought to be: For in Quarto’s
they not only leave the Signature 4 out, but rarely
put in Signature 3.
A good Compositer is ambitious as well to make the
meaning of his Author intelligent to the Reader, as
to make his Work shew graceful to the Eye, and
pleasant in Reading: Therefore if his Copy be Written
in a Language he understands, he reads his Copy
with consideration; that so he may get himself into
the meaning of the Author, and consequently considers
how to order his Work the better both in the
Title Page, and in the matter of the Book: As how
to make his Indenting, Pointing, Breaking, Italicking,
&c. the better sympathize with the Authors Genius,
and also with the capacity of the Reader.
Nor does a Compositer the least shew his skill in the
well ordering and humouring of a Title Page,
which, because it is the first Page of a Book, we
shall begin the Compositers Considerations at.
He, as aforesaid, judiciously reads his Title Page,
and considers what Word or Words have the greatest
Emphasis in it. If many Words precede the Emphasis,
he considers whether it be best to make one
or two Lines, or more of them, by electing a Body bigger
or less to Set the precedent Matter in, and whether
any of these Lines ought to be Indented, either
at one end or both, viz. Set in the middle of the
Line. And what Words of Emphasis come in that
precedent Matter; that he may Set them either in
Capitals, Roman, Italick, or English; and at last
bring the great Emphasis, which is generally the
Title or Name of the Book in a Line by it self, and
just fill it if he can; which he has some helps to do,
by the great Bodied Letters of the Lower Case, or else
by Capitals, Roman, Italick or English, of a proper Body,
which best pleases his fancy, or is in present mode.
If this Word of great Emphasis be Set in the
Lower Case, yet he Sets the first Letter a Capital, and
he Sets no Space between Letter and Letter, but
between Word and Word he does, if there happens
more than one Word in that Line: But if that Word
be Set in Capitals, he chuses to Set a Space between
every Letter, and sometimes he Sets two Spaces,
yet that is rather to drive out the Line.
If he Sets but one Space between the Letters in a
Word, he Sets three Spaces between Word and Word:
And if he Set two Spaces between Letter and Letter,
he Sets four Spaces betwen Word and Word, as well
to give a graceful appearance to the Eye, as to make
a Visible and proportionable distinction between
Word and Word.
He also considers what Whites to Set between his
Lines; as either a Line of Quadrats, and of what
Body; or (if his Title Page be large) but a Scaboard:
and at last Justifies his Page in Length, either by
adding more Whites (where they may be proper) if his
Page be too short, or by taking out or diminishing
Whites if the Page be too long: And this he does by
altering the Body of Whites, for if a White-line be
English, he may take it out, and in its room put in
Pica, Long-primmer or Brevier, according as he finds
he has Run out; yet this he does with Consideration,
where more or less White is properest.
But the mode of ordering Titles varies; as may
be seen by comparing the Title Pages of every
twenty years: Therefore a Lasting Rule cannot be
given for the ordering them: only what has been
said in general concerning Emphasis, and in particular
to humour the Eye, the Compositer has a constant
regard to.
When he is to Work upon a continued Series of
Matter, he Sets the Title of the Chapter or Section in
a bigger Body and different Character than his Matter
is Set in; as if the Matter be Set in English Roman,
he Sets the Title in Great Primer or Double
Pica Italick, but the Words of Emphasis he will Set
in Roman, and varies the Character for them as well
in the Title, as he does in the Matter.
If his Title be short, he Sets it in the middle of
the Line, by Setting Quadrats on both sides: If his
Title be long, he Sets the middle Line in the middle:
If it make three or more Lines, he Indents the
first with an m Quadrat, and the other with two
m Quadrats. Before his Title he sets a White-line,
viz. a Line of Quadrats, and so he does after it; but
with regard to what the bigness of the Body of the
Letter the Title is Set in, Runs out; for these Whites
must be set of such Bodies (bigger or less) as will
make the difference of the Body the Title is Set in,
a just number of Lines with those of the Body the
Matter is Set in, because the length of the Page, as
aforesaid, must be Justified. And he always forecasts
to put rather more than less White before the
Title than after it; because the Title has relation to
the Matter of the Chapter or Section it is Set to, and
therefore ought not to be so distinct, as from the
precedent Chapter or Section.
After his Title, he begins his Chapter or Section with
a Two-lin’d Letter, or Three or Four-lin’d Letter,
but Indents it not. He begins his Chapter or Section
with the first Line in the Stick, unless his Stick be
very Deep, or his Two or Three-lin’d Letter small,
because it may else reach above the top of the Stick,
and so hinder him from filling up Lines to the Body
of the Two or Three-lin’d Letter.
After the Two or Three-lin’d Letter, he Sets a Capital
Letter of the Body his Matter is of, and Indents
all, those Lines that are to fill up the Great Letter
with an n Quadrat.
He cannot use his Composing-Rule (mentioned in
the foregoing part of this ¶) till he have filled up
Lines to the Body of the said Great Letter; because
his Composing-Rule is too long to go between the
Great Letter and the Head of the Stick: but then
he uses the end of a Riglet to rub along the Lines he
has Composed to smoothen them, and so Set on till
he has filled up the whole Body of the Great Letter,
and most times somewhat above it; which Letter
he afterwards Justifies with Small Bodied Quadrats,
or with Scaboards or Cards, or with any or all of
them till the Great-letter stands even with the number
of Lines that it Indents, and afterwards uses
his Composing Rule, and Sets the succeeding Lines
to their full Length.
If it be a great Wooden Letter, he begins his
Chapter or Section with, it is most times too Deep
for the height of the Cheeks of his Stick; therefore
he Justifies his Stick-full just to the breadth of the
Wooden Letter with Quadrats or Quotations, and Sets
on between those Quadrats or Quotations and the
Head of his Stick, as I shewed before, till his Stick
be full of Lines; which Lines he Empties, leaving
the Quadrats or Quotations in his Stick, to serve, as
before, for the succeeding Stick or Sticks, till he
have Composed Lines enough for the Depth of the
Wooden Letter.
As he Sets on, he considers how to Point his
Work, viz. when to Set , where ; where : and
where . where to make ( ) where [ ] ? ! and when
a Break. But the Rules for these having been taught
in many School-books, I need say nothing to them
here, but refer you to them.
And as he considers how to Point, so he considers
what proper Names, either of Persons or Places, he
meets with in his Copy, as also what Words of great
Emphasis, and what Words of smaller Emphasis,
what Obsolete Words, and what Foreign, &c.
When he meets with proper Names of Persons or
Places he Sets them in Italick, if the Series of his Matter
be Set in Roman; or in Roman if the Series of his Matter
be Set in Italick, and Sets the first Letter with a Capital,
or as the Person or Place he finds the purpose
of the Author to dignifie, all Capitals; but then,
if conveniently he can, he will Set a Space between
every Letter, and two or three before and after that
Name, to make it shew more Graceful and Stately.
For Capitals express Dignity where-ever they are Set,
and Space and Distance also implies stateliness.
Words of great Emphasis are also Set in Italick,
and sometimes begin with a Capital Letter: If the
Emphasis bear hard upon the Word to be exprest as
well as the Thing to be exprest, it ought to begin with
a Capital. I shall bring for instance an Observation
I made above forty years ago on the Word that, viz.
that that Word may be reitterated five times, and
make good Sense: If it be set thus it will seem nonsense,
that that that that that; but if it be Set thus,
that that That that that Man would have stand at
the beginning of the Line should stand at the end;
it will, by toning and laying Emphasis on the middlemost
That become good Sense. Now all the
thats ought to be Set in Italick, and the middlemost
That ought to begin with a Capital, because it is
both the Thing and Word.
Words of a smaller Emphasis may be Set in the
running Character, viz. Roman, if it be the Series of the
Matter; or Italick, if Italick, but begun with a Capital:
Instance in the last Sentence, That which expresses
both the Thing and Word, &c. Here Thing and Word
both bear Emphasis, though not very great, and
therefore ought to be dignified more than those
Words that precede or follow those Words. Yet I
know some Authors are now so nice to mark both
the Word Thing and the Word Word in Italick.
After a . though not at the end of a Break he begins
with a Capital.
When in Composing he comes near a Break, he for
some Lines before he comes to it considers whether
that Break will end with some reasonable White;
If he finds it will, he is pleas’d, but if he finds he
shall have but a little single Word in his Break, he
either Sets wide to drive a Word or two more into
the Break-line, or else he Sets close to get in that
little Word, because a Line with only a little Word
in it, shews almost like a White-line, which unless
it be properly plac’d, is not pleasing to a curious
Eye.
Nor do good Compositers account it good Workmanship
to begin a Page with a Break-line, unless
it be a very short Break, and cannot be gotten in
in the foregoing Page; but if it be a long Break, he
will let it be the Direction-line of the fore-going Page,
and Set his Direction at the end of it.
Indenting after a Break (unless it be the end of a
Chapter or Section) is an m Quadrat, (more or less is
not proper) Set at the beginning of the Line: But
when Verses are Indented, two, three or four m Quadrats
are used, according to the number of the Feet
of the Verses, but most times according to the fancy
of the Author.
English obsolete Words he Sets in the English Character,
the first Letter, if the dignity of the Word
require it, as aforesaid, with a Capital.
Foreign Languages he meets with in his Copy, if
the Master Printer have them in his House, he Sets
them in the proper Character; if not, the Author
must write them in the common Character, and
the Compositer Sets them as they are written.
That I may be the less unintelligent to the Reader,
I will inform him that in Printers Dialect (as in
this last Paragraph it is used) Language is understood
Letter: For the Compositer does say, I shall
use a Word or two of Greek Letter, or Hebrew Letter,
or Saxon Letter, &c. but I shall use a word
or two of Greek, a Word or two of Hebrew, Saxon,
&c. so that the Word Letter, is in Compositers Dialect,
understood by naming the Language.
If Indentures instead of Marginal Notes come in a
number of Lines, he Indents his Stick, as I shewed
you he did for a Wooden Letter, leaving a convenient
White between his Matter and Indenture, and
then again Indents his Stick to Set the Matter
that comes in those Indentures, allowing a reasonable
White between the Top and the Bottom of his
Indenture, and then Justifies it up to an exact number
of Lines, as he did the Wooden Letter.
If Marginal Notes come down the side (or sides,
If the Page have two Columns) he chuses to Set
them in on the Stone, rather than in his Galley; because
both his Page and Notes stand safer, being
cloathed with the Furniture, than they do when
they stand Naked in the Galley. Therefore I shall
say nothing of Marginal Notes till I come to Imposing.
Some other Circumstances (according as variety
of Work does happen) a Compositer may meet with;
but by what has been said upon this and several
other Trades, the Ingenious (as they occur) may
easily consider how they are to be performed.
Nor (as afore was hinted) is a Compositer bound
to all these Circumstances and Punctilio’s, because,
in a strict sense, the Author is to discharge him of
them in his Copy: Yet it is necessary the Compositers
Judgment should know where the Author has been
deficient, that so his care may not suffer such
Work to go out of his Hands as may bring Scandal
upon himself, and Scandal and prejudice upon the
Master Printer.
We may remember the Compositer has yet a
Page in his Galley: This Page must be Tyed up with
a Packthred Cord, courser or finer according to the
bigness of his Letter and Page: For Small Letter,
which rarely is used to great Pages, he chuses a fine
Packthred, strong and limber; but for great Letter
and great Pages a stronger that will better endure
hard pulling at: Wherefore he seeks a Cord for his
purpose, or else takes so much off the whole Quoil
as will serve his turn, and taking the end on’t in
his Right Hand, lays that end about an Inch within
the Direction-line, and a little lower than the middle
of the Shank of the Letter, and holds that end
there close with the two Fore-fingers of his Left
Hand, then he slides his Right Hand along the
Cord, straining it as stiff as he can along the right
side of the Page, and turns it about the Head of
the Page as close down to the Ledge of the Galley as
he can, and so slides his Hand over the Cord till he
draws it about all the sides of the Page: and when he
comes to the first end of the Cord, he doubles up
that end so as it stand above the Face of the Letter,
and whips the Cord over that end, that the
end may not slip; then he twists part of the remaining
Cord about his Right Hand, and grasping
his Left Hand Fingers about the Direction Corner
of the Page, as well to hold the end of the Cord
from slipping, as to keep the Page tight in its position,
with his Right Hand he pulls the Cord as
hard down the side of the Page as he can; and
keeping the Cord straining, whips it again about
the Head and other sides of the Page, and so again
about all the sides of the Page, keeping it still straining;
and always as he comes to the Right Hand side
of the Page, pulling hard, and taking care that it
slip not: Having whipt the Cord twice about the
Page, he holding two of his Left Hand Fingers
against the Direction-corner upon the Cord, that it
slip not, with the Ball of his Thumb of his Right
Hand, and the Balls of his Fingers to assist, thrusts
against the opposite diagonal corner of the Page,
and removes it a little from the Ledges of the Galley,
that he may with the Nail of the Thumb of his
Right Hand have room to thrust the Cord whipt
about the Page, lower down upon the Shank of the
Letter, (to make room for succeeding whippings
of the Cord, and then thrusts or draws the Page
close to the Ledges of the Galley again; then whips
the Cord again about the Page (as before) till he has
whipt it four or five times about the Page, taking care
that the several whippings lye parallel to each other,
not lapping over any of the former whippings.
Having whipt the Cord four or five times about
the Page, he with his Bodkin or the corner of a
Brass Rule (which lies best at hand) fastens the Cord,
by thrusting a noose of it between the several whippings
and the Right Hand side of the Page, close up
to the Direction-line, then draws the lower part of
that Noose close up to the very corner of the Direction-line,
that it may be the better fastned between
the Page and the Whippings: Then, if his Cord be
not of a just length, he cuts it off from the rest of
the Quoil, leaving so much length to it as that the
end of it may stand upright an Inch or two above
the Face of the Letter; the reason will shew it self
when we come to Imposing. Then he removes the
Page pretty far from the Ledges of the Galley, to see
if the Whippings lye about the middle of the Shank
of the Letter; if they lye too high, as most commonly
they do, he thrusts them lower with the
Nail or Nails of his Thumbs. Then (if the Page be
not too broad) he places his Fore or Middle Finger,
or both, of his Right Hand on the Right Hand Side
of the Page, and his Thumb on the Left; and
bowing his other Finger or Fingers under the
Head of the Page, he rears up the Handle-end of
his Galley with his Left Hand almost upright, and
so discharges the Galley of the Page, by delivering
it upright into his Right Hand. Having his Page
upright in his Right Hand, at the Head, he claps
the Fingers of his Left Hand about the Foot of the
Page, upon the ends of the Lines on the Right Hand
Side of the Page, and his Thumb on the Left Hand
side of the Page, with the Palm of his Hands towards
the Face of the Letter, and such Fingers as
he can spare bowed under the Foot of the Page,
turning the Page with the Face of the Letter from
him, and letting it rest upon the inside of his Fingers,
under the Right Hand Side of the Page, and
so goes with it to the Correcting-stone.
But if the Correcting-stone be full of Forms or other
Letter, as many times it is, then before he begins
to Tye up his Page he provides a Sheet of Waste
Paper, supposing it a Quarto Page, and doubles
that Sheet in four, and while he has the Page upright
in that Hand (as aforesaid) he takes that
doubled Sheet into the Palm of his Left Hand, and
claps it against the bottom of the Page, and turning
his Left Hand outward, receives the Page flat upon
the Paper on the Palm of his Hand: Then with his
Right Hand grasps the Sides of the Page and the
Sides of the Paper, which turn up again above the
bottom of the Page, and sets it on a Letter Board,
or some other board in a convenient place under
his Case. He places that Page on the Left Hand the
Board with the Foot of the Page towards him, that
the other Pages that are in like manner set on the
Board afterwards, may stand by it in an orderly
succession against he comes to Impose them.
If it be a large Folio Page, or a Broad-side he has
Tyed up, he cannot take that into his Hands, because
it is too broad for his Grasp; therefore he carries
his Galley, Page and all to the Correcting-stone,
and turns the Handle of the Galley towards him,
and taking hold of the Handle with his Right Hand,
he places his Thumb and Ball of his Thumb on his
Left Hand, against the inside the Head-ledge of the
Galley, to hold it and keep it steady, and by the
Handle draws the Slice with the Page upon it, out
of the Galley, letting the Slice rest upon the Correcting-stone:
Then he thrusts the Head-end of the
Slice so far upon the Correcting-stone, that the Foot
of the Page may stand an Inch or two within the
outer edge of the Correcting-stone; and placing his
Left Hand against the Foot of the Page, in the same
posture he last plac’d it against the Head-ledge of the
Galley, he draws the Slice from under the bottom of
the Page, and leaves it upon the Correcting-stone. See
Plate 25. at A.
Plate 25.
Imposing is the placing of the Pages that belong to a
Sheet, with the Chase and Furniture about them, in such
an order as when the Sheet is wrought off at the Press,
all the Pages may be Folded into an orderly succession.
There are four Volumns in use that are differently
Imposed, viz. Folio, Quarto, Octavo and Twelves.
The manner of Imposing these Sheets will be plainer
represented in a Table than by many words;
therefore in Plates 26, 27, 28. I have given you
Drafts of each Volumn, both First and Second Form,
viz. White Paper and Reteration; as you may see
noted over each Form in the Plates. For Example,
the two Forms in the Folio Sheet: In the First Form
you may see 1 on the Left Hand and 4 on the
Right, which shews that the First Page must stand
on the Correcting-stone on that Hand, and the
Fourth on the Right Hand, with the Foots of the
Pages towards you; and so for all the other Forms.
The number of the Page belonging to each Sheet
is marked in what place it is to stand on the Stone
in the Chase, and the Figures of those Numbers are
placed with their Head and Foot upwards and
downwards, as the Heads and Foots of the Pages
must stand in the Chase.
Plate 26.
The places of these Pages for all Volumns the Compositer
has always in his memory, yet has he a help if he
remember the places of but the first half of the number
of Pages of each Volumn: For if he knows the place
of the first Page, the Page that stands next it must be
that number which makes one more than the number
of all the Pages in the Sheet. For Example, in the Folio;
next the First Page stands the Fourth Page, 1 and 4
added makes 5, viz. one more than the number of
Pages in the whole Sheet. See Plate 26. Again, In the
Twelves Volumn next the First Page stands the Twenty
Fourth, 1 and 24 added makes 25: Next 2 stands 23,
which added makes 25, viz. one more than the number
of Pages in the whole Sheet. This is a help, and a certain
Rule for placing the Pages of any Volumn, if
he knows but by memory the places of the first half
number. See Plate 27. Thus you will find an Even
and an Odd Page stand together.
Plate 27
The other Volumns, viz. Sixteens, Twenty-fours,
Thirty-two’s, are but the Octavo’s and Twelves doubled,
or twice doubled and Imposed in Half-Sheets.
For Example, The Sixteens is two Octavo’s Imposed
on each side the Short Cross; the Twenty-fours is two
Twelves Imposed on each side the Long Cross, and a
Thirty-two’s is four Octavo’s Imposed in each Quarter
of the Chase. And thus they double a Volumn as
oft as they think fit. But as was said before, they
are Imposed on each side the Cross, or in each Quarter
of the Chase, as the Volumn that is doubled or
re-doubled is Imposed in the whole Chase.
In Half-sheets, all the Pages belonging to the
White Paper and Reteration are Imposed in one Chase,
and are plac’d, as you see by the Drafts (in Plate
28.) of Half-sheet Forms. So that when a Sheet
of Paper is Printed on both sides with the same
Form, that Sheet cut in two in the Short Cross, if
Quarto or Octavo, and in the Short and Long Cross,
if Twelves, and folded as Octavo or Twelves; the
Pages (I say) of each Half-sheet shall follow in an
orderly succession.
Plate 28.
Having premised thus much, he takes up the
Pages he set by on Papers in an orderly succession
when he Tyed them up, grasping the edges of the
Papers that stick up on both sides the Page tight,
that so the bottom of the Paper may stand the
stronger against the bottom of the Letter, to keep
it from falling out; and bringing it thus to the
Correcting-stone, he gets the two last Fingers of his
Right Hand under the Head of the Page, but not
under the Paper sticking up about the Head of the
Page, keeping his other two Fingers and Thumb
on the sides of the Page, and slips or slides his Left
Hand, so as the Palm of it may turn towards the
bottom of the Page; and rearing the Page up on
end on his Right Hand, he discharges his Left to
take away the Paper behind the Page; then he grasps
his Left Hand about the Foot-end of the Page in the
same posture that his Right Hand grasps the Head-end.
And having the Page thus between his Hands
with the bottom of the Letter towards him, he
directs both his Hands to the place on the Stone
where the Page must stand, and claps it down on
the Stone so nimbly, that the whole bottom of the
Page comes all at once to the Face of the Stone,
lest otherwise he endanger the Breaking, Squabbling,
or Hanging, &c. of the Page. And thus he sets
down all the Pages of the Form: which having
plac’d in order and rank, as before I have shew’d in
the Drafts of each respective Volumn, he lays the
Chase about them; and (if he have not a Form
already Drest) seeks out Inner Side and Head-sticks
of such a thickness, as with the Cross may make
a Margin between the adjoyning Pages convenient
to the Volumn and size of the Paper.
If his Side or Head-sticks be a little too thin, and
and he cannot find any to his intended thickness, he
puts a Scaboard or two between the Head or
Side-stick and the Cross, as well to have more Margin
as to commode the Press-man (if occasion be) when
he makes Register, as I shall further shew when I
come to the Section of the Press-man.
Then he seeks outer Side and Foot-sticks, his Side-sticks
of the exact length of the Page, or a Scaboard
shorter, or he cuts them to that length, that the
Foot-stick Bear not against the end of the Side-stick,
because then the Letter will not Rise; for the
Foot-stick must be a little longer than the breadth of
the Page, that it may shoot beyond the end of the
Side-stick.
Then he fits the Chase and Furniture at Side and
Foot, with Fore and Hind Quoins, and takes off the
Cords from the Pages, as shall be shew’d by and by.
But if Marginal Notes come down the Side or
or Sides of the Pages (for if there be two Columns in a
Page, the Marginal Notes may come down both
sides) then, before he fits his Foot-sticks he sets a
Scaboard the length of the Page, against the side of
the Page the Notes come on, and a row of Quotations
almost down the length of the Page, or sometimes
but one or two in a place at convenient
distances, to keep the Letter of the Side of the Page
upright, according as he finds his particular Notes
stand near or far asunder, and afterwards fits his
Foot-stick. Then he Sets his Notes, commonly
between the Cheeks of his Stick, which for that purpose
are fitted to the Measure of the Quotation: And
having Set them, he places them in the proper places
where they must come in, and with Quotation
Quadrats of proper Bodies, Justifies them up, feeling
(at last) carefully and cautiously at the Foot, that
they be neither too soft nor too hard Justified to the
length of the Page.
Now if he have a Chase, or Form, or Furniture already
Drest (these several phrases are used, though
they all signifie the same thing.) If he have (I say)
a Form Drest, that is, if he or other Workmen have
been Working on the same Work, i. e. Book, before
he uses one of the Wrought-off Forms, and having it
on a Letter-board, Rinc’d, as was shew’d in ¶ 2.
of this Section, he places it on a Bench or Joint-stool,
on that Hand that stands most commodious with
that end of the Stone he Imposes on, and so as there
may be a corresponding position, with the Form
Wrought off and that Imposing, viz. that the First
Page (and consequently all the rest) of the Wrought
off Form stands on the same Hand with the First
Page of that Form that is Imposing.
Then taking out and laying the Quoins in their
proper places, as I shew’d when he Stript the Form,
at the latter end of ¶ 2. he a little wriggles the
Chase from one Side to the other, and forward and
backwards to Loosen it, and the Cross or Crosses from
the close pinching of the Letter and Furniture:
then takes it off the Chase, and lays it about those
Pages he is Imposing: Then with his two fore-fingers
and Thumbs he takes away the Inner Side-stick
and the Head-stick at once, and at once removes
them to the responding Quarter of the Form Imposing,
into the responding places from whence he took
them in the Wrought off Form. And as he does by
the Inner Side-sticks, so he does by the outer Side-sticks,
and by the Quoins; placing them in their
respective proper places between the Furniture and
Chase, or so many of the foremost Quoins, as will
go in before the Cords are unwhipt from the Pages.
Thus the Wrought off Form is Stript and Naked;
and stands by to Destribute.
Having thus translated the whole Furniture of
the Wrought off Form to the Form Imposing, he finds
the end of the Cord that he left sticking up above the
Face of the Letter (which perhaps by this time is
got between the Furniture and the Page) and laying
the Ball of his left Thumb, on the Face of the Letter
at the Direction corner of the Page, to keep it from
Rising, he takes the aforesaid end of the Cord, between
the Fore-finger and Thumb of his Right Hand, and
pulls gently to loosen the Noose that fastned the Cord
when he Tyed up the Page, till he draws the Noose
out, and after it successively all the several Whippings;
which done, he places the Balls of his
Thumbs, one against the middle of the Side-stick,
and the other against the middle of the Foot-stick,
and at once thrusts the Page close against the Inner-Side
and Head-stick, and so makes room to get in
all the Quoins. But if there be more than one Page
in a Quarter, as in Octavo’s and Twelves, then he
unties all the Pages of that Quarter, beginning with
the Inner Pages first, before he can put in the
Quoins. Then again, thrusting hard with his
Thumbs, against the outer Sides of the Side and
Foot-sticks of the several Quarters, to thrust the
Letter up tight and Square, he looks over the Form
as nicely as he can, to see what Letter or Letters
may Rise in the Form, (that is, stand higher than the
rest) and with the Balls of his Fingers of both his
Hands, (the Quoins being close and hard thrust up)
pats upon the Face of the Letter to beat them down:
But this is not enough to smoothen the Form, but
only to smoothen it so as the edges of the Dressing-block
(when it comes to smoothen it quite) may not
job against them. Then he takes the Dressing-block,
described Section 9. ¶ 3. in his left Hand, and lays
the smooth side of it upon the Face of the Letter,
at the bottom of the Quarter next him; or he takes
the Shooting stick, or sometimes the lower part of
the clutched Fist of his right Hand, and knocks
either with the Head of the Shooting-stick (or his Fist,
as aforesaid) gently upon the upper Side of the
Dressing-block, with quick knocks, removing the
Dressing-block in a lineal rank upwards, and knocking
still quick upon it, as it goes along and comes down
again with the Dressing-block, in another lineal rank
parallel to the first: Then in the same order goes
up again and down again, till he have run over the
whole Form, still knocking with quick knocks upon
the Dressing-block, that so he may be sure to press
down every Rising Letter in the whole Form, if he
see any Spaces or Quadrats stick up, he thrusts them
down with his Bodkin.
Then to Lock up the Form, he takes the Shooting-stick
in his Left Hand and the Mallet in his Right,
and placing the Foot of the Shooting-stick against the
small Quoin between the Side stick and the Chase,
drives that a little gently up, and then removes the
Shooting-stick to the next Quoin, and so to the third
Quoin (if there be so many) between the Side-stick
and the Chase; Then removes his knocking to the
thick end of the Foot-stick, and afterwards knocks
the Foot Quoins gently up: Then knocks pretty
strongly with the Shooting-stick against the thick end
of the Side stick, and Drives the Quoins yet harder
up: Then to the thick end of the Foot stick, and
and Drives those Quoins also harder up. Then at last
knocking again, against the thick ends of the Side
and Foot-sticks, he knocks up the Quoins so hard,
as that he thinks the Form may Rise: To try if it
will, he draws the hither Side of the long Side of
the Chase, about an Inch or two over the edge of
the Stone; and putting his two hands under the Chase,
Dances the Form three or four times so as it may just
Rise off the Face of the Stone: but not so high as that
any loose Letters or Spaces may drop out, if there
be any in; but only so high as he may see if there
be any in or no. If he finds there are many in that
do not Rise with the Form, he says the Form Dances,
wherefore he looks carefully upon his Pages of Letter,
to find out the Cause: For generally, either the
Letter Hangs or the Lines, are ill Justified: or else it
is not Hard enough Lockt up.
If he finds by his Eye the Letter Hangs: he must
Un-lock and Loosen the Form, or that Quarter that
Hangs pretty Loose, that the Letter may be set to
Right; which he does with patting upon the Face of
the Letter where it Hangs, with the Balls of the
Fingers of both his Hands, to twist or turn them
into a Square Position.
If it be only a Single Letter or two that drops,
he thrusts the end of his Bodkin between every Letter
of that Word, till he comes to a Space: and then
perhaps by forcing those Letters closer, he may have
room to put in another Space or a Thin Space; which
if he cannot do, and he finds the Space stand Loose
in the Form; he with the Point of his Bodkin picks
the Space up and bows it a little; which bowing
makes the Letters on each side the Space keep their
parallel distance; For by its Spring it thrusts the
Letters that were closed with the end of the Bodkin
to their adjunct Letters, that needed no closing. Or
sometimes he chews a small bit of Paper, and with
the Point of his Bodkin forces that in on one side of
the Space: and so fills up the Vacancy between the
Space and the Letter. But both these ways are
meer present Helps, and (in plain terms) accounted
Botches, as being an Argument that his Lines were
not well Justified in his Stick.
If he finds the Form or any part of it, was not
hard enough Lockt up, he Locks all, or part harder
up, as was shew’d before.
But now his Form Rises; Wherefore he draws the
Long Side of the Chase (as before) a little over the
edge of the Correcting-Stone, and putting two or three
of his Fingers into the Vacancy between the Quoins,
or else into the Vacancy at the ends of the Chase; he
rears the Form upon the farther Side of the Chase,
and removing his right Hand to the Short end of
the Chase, grasps it near the upper corner, and then
discharges his left Hand also; and removes it to the
diagonal corner of the Chase; and so slides the long
Side of the Chase off the hither Edge of the Correcting-Stone:
Then slipping his Hands to the bottom of
the Chase, about two or three Inches within the
corners, with the insides of his Hands towards the
Face of the Letter, and leaning the upper Side of
the Chase against the upper part of his Breast, and
clutching the Brawn of the inside of the upper Joynt
of his Arm over the upper corners of the Chase, he
carries the Form so before him to the Press, and lays
it upon the Stone, for the Press-man to make a Proof
of. The Proof being made, the Press-man brings the
Proof, and layes it on the Compositers Case: and he
brings the Form again and layes it on the Correcting-Stone,
and rubs it over with the Ly-Brush, as shall
be shew’d in proper place. And the Compositer gives
the Correcter the Proof and his Copy to Correct it by:
which being Corrected, the Correcter gives it again to
the Compositer to Correct the Form by.
If there be but few Faults, and those easie ones,
the Compositer Gathers the Corrections in his Stick,
beginning at the bottom of every Page, and so ascending
upwards: Because when he is Correcting, the
Corrections of the top of the Page stand then first in
the Stick, and therefore are readiest to his Hand.
But if there be many Faults he brings the Lower-Case
to the Correcting Stone, and takes his Corrections as
he uses them.
Then with the Mallet and Shooting-stick he Unlocks
the Form, as was shew’d in ¶ 3 of this Section. But
keeps the Quoins pretty tight up, to secure the Letter
from Squabbling or Hanging.
Then he Folds his Proof so oft double, till all
the Pages, except that he intends to Correct first
are Folded out of Sight, and he also Folds down the
Left Hand Margin of that Page under the Proof, and
then lays that Folded Side of the Page along, and
close to the same Page in the Mettle: So that the
Head-line in the Proof lye in the same range with
the Head-line on the Mettle, and the Foot-line even
with the Foot-line on the Mettal, and consequently
all the Lines of that Page both on the Proof and Mettal
agree, and stand in a mutual range.
Now therefore he looks in the Proof, to see where
the Correcter has markt a Fault, and having found
it in the Proof, he runs along that Line with his Eye
to the same Line on the Mettle, which he easily does,
because the Line of Mettle stands in the same range
with that in the Proof, and finding the Fault in the
Mettle also, he having now his Bodkin in his right
Hand, with the Blade of it between his Fore-finger
and Thumb, within half an Inch or three quarters
of the Point, and the middle of the Bodkin within
his clutched Hand to guide and command it, he
sticks the Point of his Bodkin into the Neck of the
Letter, viz. between the Beard and the Face, and
lifts it with the Point of the Bodkin so high up above
the Face of the other Letters, that he can lay hold of
it with the Fore-finger and Thumb of his left Hand
to take it quite out.
I must a little digress, to paraphrase on the posture
he holds the Bodkin in: For in the sticking his Bodkin
into the Letter, he holds the Blade of it, so that it
may make as small an angle with the Face of the
Letter in the Form as he can, viz. as flat towards
the Face of the Letter as he can, without touching
the Face of any of the adjacent Letters with the
Blade of the Bodkin; For if he touches the Face
though lightly, yet it may more or less Batter and
spoil the Face of those Letters it touches, and so he
creates himself a fresh trouble to mend them.
The reason why he holds the Blade of the Bodkin
as flat to the Form as he can, is, Because a small
Horizontalish entrance of the Point of the Bodkin
into the Neck of the Letter, will raise the Letter up
above the Face of the Form, the Blade of the Bodkin
being fastned in the little Hole it makes in the Neck
of the Letter: But if he should stick the Point of
the Bodkin straight or straightish down upon any
part of the Letter, it would indeed make an Hole,
but not fasten in the Mettle, to draw it up; for the
weight of the Letter would make it slip off the round
and smooth Point of the Bodkin. Besides the pressing
the Point of the Bodkin with his right Hand
against the side of the next Letter on his left Hand,
keeps the Point of the Bodkin fast in the little Hole
it makes in the Neck of the Letter, and therefore
though the Bodkin have but a little entrance, yet it
has hold enough to draw it up by. Now to return.
Having taken the Fault out, he puts the Letter
that the Correcter markt in the Margin of the Proof
in the room of it. Suppose an o were markt and
n dasht out, therefore when he has taken the n out
he puts an o in the room: These two Letters being
of equal thickness, gives him no trouble to Justifie
the Line again after the Fault is Corrected; but if
they had been of unequal thicknesses, as suppose an
m to come out, and an n to be put in; in this
case he puts in a Space between two words (where
he finds most convenient) to Justifie the Line again:
Or suppose an n to come out, and an m to be put
in; now he must take out a Space where he finds
most convenient to make room for the m, as being
thicker by a Space than an n. Thus as he Corrects
he still has a care to keep his Lines true Justified;
which he tries by pressing the Balls of his two
middle Fingers pretty hard against the ends of three
Lines, to make them rise a little above the Face of
the Form, whereof the Line he examines is the
middlemost; for if that Line is not hard enough
Justified, he will between the Balls of his Fingers
find it hollow, or it will not Rise with the other
two: And if it be too hard Justified, he will find
the Balls of his Fingers Bear only or hardest against
that Line, and the Line on each side it will not Rise.
If there be a long word or more left out, he
cannot expert to Get that in into that Line, wherefore
he must now Over-run; that is, he must put so
much of the fore-part of the Line into the Line
above it, or so much of the hinder part of the Line
into the next Line under it, as will make room for
what is Left out: Therefore he considers how Wide
he has Set, that so by Over-runing the fewer Lines
backwards or forwards, or both, (as he finds his help)
he may take out so many Spaces, or other Whites
as will amount to the Thickness of what he has Left
out: Thus if he have Set wide, he may perhaps Get
a small Word or a Syllable into the foregoing Line; and
perhaps another small Word or Syllable in the following
Line, which if his Leaving out is not much, may
Get it in: But if he Left out much, he must Over-run
many Lines, either backwards or forwards, or both,
till he come to a Break: And if when he comes at
a Break it be not Gotten in; he Drives out a Line.
In this case if he cannot Get in a Line, by Getting
in the Words of that Break (as I just now shew’d you
how he Gets-in what was left out in the Proof) or
by making less White to the Title of a Section or
Chapter (if any happen in that Page) he must Over-run
the next Page backwards or forwards, till that
Line Comes in: Thus sometimes he Over-runs all the
succeeding Pages of the Sheet, and at last perhaps
Drives out a Line to Come in in the next Sheet.
If he have Set a word or small sentence twice, he
must take that out, and Drive-out his Matter. If he
be near a Break, and the White of that Break not
very long, he may perhaps Drive it Out at the Break
by putting in part of the next Line to fill up almost
so much as he took out; but not quite so much,
unless his Matter was at first so Wide Set that he
can Space out no more, or unless the Break-line he
comes to have so much White in it that he fears
Getting-in that Line: If either of these inconveniences
happen, he Drives-out as much as he can
backwards in the Matter; that is, he takes out so
much as he thinks he cannot Drive-out when he is at
the Break: He takes it out at the beginning of the
Line, and puts it in at the latter end of the Line
before it: But first he takes out almost so much of
the beginning of his Second upper Line, to make
room for it: I say almost so much, because he
intends to Space-out the rest if it were not too Wide
Set at first. And thus he runs on from Line to Line,
still taking out less and less at the beginning of
every former Line, and putting it into the Line
above that, that he may Space-out his Matter as he
Over-runs, till his Double-Setting is Driven-out.
But if he have Set a Line or Lines twice, and
cannot Drive it or them Out at a Break or Breaks;
or that he cannot Set more Whites at the beginning
of a Section or Chapter, he must Over-run the next
Page or more, or the whole Sheet till it be Driven-out:
And if in Over-runing the whole Sheet
it be not Driven-out, he must Set so many
Lines, of the following Matter as will make up
the last Page.
Many times either for Getting-in or Driving-out,
the Compositer will chuse to Over-run in his Stick, and
then he Wets the Page he is to Over-run, with the
Spunge (that the Letter may the better stick together)
and he separates so much of the former part of the
Page as he intends to Over-run, from the rest of the
Page, and places himself before the Notches of the
Letter, and takes up about an Inch and an half or
two Inches of the first Separated Line, and brings it
to the Stick; and as it it is coming along he turns
the Notches upwards, and places that Taking up in
the Stick. When he Takes-up, he places the Inside
of the first Joynt of his middle Finger of his right
Hand against the beginning of that Line, and the
Ball of his Thumb against the other end of that
Taking-up, and the Ball of his Fore-finger behind the
Taking-up, about the middle of it, and so pinching
it lightly brings it to his Stick, as aforesaid. And
having thus by several Takings-up, gotten a Line
into his Stick, he looks it over to see what Spaces
or other White he can take out or put in, according
as he has either Left-out or Set-twice, and then he
Justifies the Line again, as was shew’d in ¶ 5. of
this Section. And thus he Over-runs Line after Line,
till he has Gotten-in or Drove-out his Leaving-out,
or his Twice Set Matter.
If the Compositer is not firmly resolv’d to keep himself
strictly to the Rules of good Workmanship,
he is now tempted to make Botches; viz. Pidgeon-holes,
Thin-Spaces, no Space before a Capital, Short
&s, Abbreviations or Titled Letters, Abbreviate
Words, &c. And if Botching is in any Case excusable,
it is in this; for with too great Spacing-out or
too Close Setting, he many times may save himself a
great deal of Labour, besides the vexation of mind, and
other accidental mischiefs that attend Over-running.
It sometimes chances that a Compositer, by having
two or more Pages in his Sheet with the same
Direction-line, or by mistaking the right place of his
Page when he set it by on a Paper under his Case,
as was shew’d ¶ 7. of this Section, or by some
other accident that may happen; I say it sometimes
happens (but seldom through too much care) that
he Transposes two Pages, or more, in his Sheet: In
this case he Unlocks that Quarter, or those Quarters
the Pages are in, and loosning the Cross or Crosses
from those Pages and their Furniture, takes the rest
off the Correcting-stone with their Furniture about
them: And if it be a Folio or Quarto he does not
wet the Pages, because those Forms have Furniture
about every side of the Page, which will keep up
the Letter from falling down; But he only places
the Balls of his two Thumbs against the outside of
the Furniture, about the middle of the Head and
Foot of the Page, and the insides of his two middle
Fingers, assisted by his Fourth and Little Fingers,
in a parallel position to his middle Fingers,
(to strengthen them against the Furniture) about
the middle of the Sides of the Page, letting the
length of his Fingers reach as far from each corner
of the Page towards the middle of it as he can,
and so by a steady pressing the Balls of his Thumbs
and the Balls of his Fingers on each Hand towards
each other, he draws, or as he sees most convenience,
thrusts the whole Page out of its wrong place,
and sets it by on the Stone, till in the same manner
he removes the other Transpos’d Page into the place
of the first remov’d Page: And thus if there be
more than two Transpos’d Pages in the Sheet, he removes
them all, and Sets the right Pages in their
right places.
But if it be an Octavo or Twelves, or any other
Form that has Gutter-sticks between two Pages, he
must Wet those Pages he leaves on the Stone, because
when he removes one Page, by the help of
the Gutter-stick, one side of the other Page will stand
Naked; and consequently with the Shaking, Joggling,
or Trembling of the Stone or Floor, the Letters
on that side will be in great hazard of falling
down, especially if the Face of the Stone happens
not to be truly Horizontal: I say, happens not to
be truly Horizontal, because the Stone is seldom laid
with any caution, but only by guess.
Having placed the Pages in their right places, he
again lays the Chase about them, and Locks them
up again, as was shew’d in ¶ 7. of this Section:
Then he carries the Form to the Press, and lays it
on the Stone for a Second Proof, and sometimes for
a Third Proof; which having Corrected, he at last
brings the Form to the Press, and again lays it on
the Stone Right, viz. in Folio’s and Octavo’s with
the Foot of the First or Third Page (which he easily
knows by their Signatures) towards him, and the
side of it next the Plattin: And in Quarto’s and
Twelves, with the Foot of the First or Third Page
next the Tympan.
After all this Correcting a Revise is made, and if
any Faults are found in any Quarter of it, or in all
the Quarters, he calls to the Press-man to Unlock
that Quarter, or the whole Form, that he may Correct
those Faults: For when the Form is on the Press
it is not the Compositers task to Un-lock the Form:
Neither would a good Press-man be content he
should make a knocking on his Press, especially if
the Press-man have Made-ready his Form, as shall be
shewed in the next Section.
Counting or Casting off Copy (for both Phrases are
indifferently us’d) is to examine and find how much
either of Printed Copy will Come-in into any intended
number of Sheets of a different Body or Measure
from the Copy; or how much Written Copy will
make an intended number of Sheets of any assigned
Body and Measure.
The Rule and Method of Counting off either Printed
or Written Copy is the same, only Written Copy
is more difficult, because subject to be irregularly
Writ: Therefore if I shew you how the Compositer
Casts off Written Copy, I do at the same time inform
you how to Count off Printed Copy.
The Compositer therefore first considers what Bodied
Letter his Work is to be wrought on: then he
carefully peruses the Copy, considering with himself
whether it be evenly Written or unevenly Written,
viz. whether it be throughout of an equal siz’d
Hand, or whether part be close Written and part
wide Written; if it be an equal siz’d Hand, that is,
equally close Written in general, as well between
Letter and Letter, Word and Word, as between
Line and Line, he has scarce more trouble to Count
it off than Printed Copy.
Wherefore, the Measure being given, he Composes
one Line in his Measure: The Matter he Composes
he chuses out of that part of his Copy that in his
Judgement he admits is most indifferently Written,
between Wide and Close, as being such as his whole
Copy, one part with another, will likeliest Come-in
alike with. This Line being Compos’d, he considers
how much of his Copy it takes up, viz. whether it
runs Line for Line, or whether two Lines of his
Copy make one Line in his Stick; or whether a Line
and an half, or a quarter, or half quarter of his
Copy, &c. make one Line in his Stick; or whether
a Line of his Copy make two Lines in his Stick, or
a Line and a half, or a quarter, or half a quarter,
&c. and accordingly calculates what just number
of Lines will make another just number of Lines in
his Stick. For Example.
If his Copy and Measure run Line for Line, then
consequently 10, 20, 30 Lines of the Copy will make
10, 20, 30 Lines in the Measure; and accordingly he
counts what number of Lines in his Copy will make
a Page; and by that, what number of Lines will
make two Pages, four Pages, eight Pages, and
consequently so many Pages and Sheets as he is
to Count off.
If two Lines of Copy make one Line in the Stick,
then consequently ten Lines in the Copy will make
five Lines in the Stick; twenty Lines in the Copy
ten Lines in the Stick, &c.
If a Line and a half of the Copy make one Line
in the Stick, then fifteen Lines of Copy makes ten
Lines in the Stick, thirty makes twenty, &c.
But a pair of Compasses makes the best expedition
in Counting off of Copy, and (by my experience)
I have found the surest way. I Compose one Line as
aforesaid; if the Line I Compos’d Gets-in part of the
next Line, viz. the second Line of the Copy, I
place one Foot of a pair of Compasses at the beginning
of the First Line, and open the other Foot to
what was Got-in of the Second Line, and turn the
Compasses about upon the Foot in the Second Line,
till the other Foot reach the Third Line of the Copy;
then turn about the Foot in the Third Line of the
Copy till the other Foot falls in the Fourth Line of
the Copy; and so from the Fourth, to the Fifth,
Sixth, &c. till the Compasses end with a Line in
the Copy, or near the end of a Line, remembring as
I go along, how oft I turn’d the Compasses about.
Suppose, for Example, seven times: Then I number
the Lines of Copy, beginning with the first Line
and ending with the last Line, that the Points of
the Compasses were turn’d over, and find them
Eight, Nine, Ten, &c. and say Eight, Nine, Ten,
&c.Lines of the Copy, makes Seven Lines of
the Measure.
As now I have shew’d you how I Count off Copy
if it come in more than Line for Line, so I shall
shew you how I proceed if a Line in the Copy Drive
out in the Measure.
It is but placing one Foot of a pair of Compasses
at the farther end of the first Line, and opening the
other Foot to the place where the Compos’d Line
ended, and by turning about the Compasses, as
before, to the Second, Third, Fourth Lines, &c.
till they end in the beginning of a Line in the Copy;
for then (as before) counting the number of Lines,
beginning with the first, and ending with the last;
Suppose Eight, Nine, Ten, &c. I say Eight, Nine,
Ten, &c.Lines of the Copy makes so many Lines
as is the number of times the Feet of the Compasses
were turned about, between the first Line and
the last Line.
Another way Arithmetically perform’d.
Suppose it be requir’d to know how many Sheets
127 Pages of Written Copy will make? I count the
number of Letters contained in an ordinary Written
Line of Copy, such a Line as I guess is likely to
RunLine for Line with the generality of the rest of
the Copy: And (for Example) I find 43 Letters in
that Line: Then I count the number of Lines in an
whole Page, and find 35 Lines, I Multiply 43 by
35, the Product is 1505 for the number of Letters
in an whole Page: Then I multiply 1505 by 127,
the number of Pages in the whole Written Copy;
the Product is 191135, the number of Letters in
the whole Written Copy.
If it be now required to know how many Sheets
in Quarto, of the English Body this Written Copy
will make, agreeable to any Measure already Printed?
As for Example, the length of a Page given is
33 Lines, and in one Line is contained 47 Letters:
I multiply 47, the number of Letters in one Line,
by 33, the number of Lines in a Page, the Product
is 1551. With this Product I divide 191135, the
number of Letters in the whole Written Copy, and
the Product gives 123, that is, 123 Pages in Quarto,
which divided by 8, the number of Pages in one
Sheet, gives 15 Sheets and 3 Pages.
If it be required to know how many Sheets it will
make of Pica in an Octavo, or of Long Primer or
Brevier in Twelves, &c. the manner of Working is
the same: For Multiplying the number of Letters
in one Line by the number of Lines in one Page,
and Deviding the number of Letters in the whole
Work (suppose, as in the foregoing Operation by
191135) by the number of Letters in one Page, the
Product gives the number of Pages in the Quotient:
And then at last Deviding the number of Pages
by 16 if an Octavo, or 24 if Twelves, &c. you have
in the Quotient the number of Sheets, and in the Remain
(if any be) the number of Pages.
These two last ways are the surest Rules for Counting
off Copy: But yet the Compositer has several Considerations
upon his Copy before he dares conclude he
has truly and exactly Counted off.
For first, a strict regard must be had to the Breaks
that come in the Copy: For long Breaks in the Copy
are generally likely to be Got-in, and consequently
a Line is Got-in: But short Breaks often Drive-out a
Line. Therefore though the Compositer has already
in general Cast off his Copy, yet he more particularly
considers his Breaks; and indeed they serve as so
many Regulators to him, to keep him within the
bounds of his Counted off Copy: For every Break he
examines by the number of Lines from the last
Break, by the length of the Break, and by the close
or wide Writing of his Copy, whether it will be Got-in
or Drove-out, and accordingly marks it in his Copy,
before he reckons he has done Counting off.
A Break to be Got-in he marks thus [, and adjoyns
in Numerical Figures, the number of Lines the
Matter between the last Break and it will make.
A Break to be Drove-out he marks thus - - -, and (as
aforesaid) adjoyns Numerical Figures to remember
him what number of Lines he accounted that Matter
to make from the last Break.
If Chapters, Sections or Paragraphs happens in the
Copy, the Compositer takes room enough to set them
and their Titles gracefully in; and marks in Numerical
Figures what number of Lines he assigns
for it.
If as he Counts off his Copy he finds Abreviated
Words, he tells the Abreviated Words to the full
number of Letters that spells the Word at length,
because in Composing he Sets those Words at length:
And should he not consider it in his Counting off, he
would in Composing find his Matter Run out from
his Copy.
Scarce any Copy is so regularly Written (as hath
several times before been hinted) but that some
places are Wider, and other places Closer Written,
than the generality of the Copy, wherefore he considers
both these accidents in his Copy, and accordingly
allows for them.
If it happens that much Italick comes in the Copy,
as sometimes two or three Lines, or more, or half
a Page, an whole Page, or several Pages; the Compositer
considers Italick is thinner than Roman, and
consequently Gets-in more than Roman does, and
therefore in his Counting off will allow accordingly
for it.
The proportion that I allow for it is as 9 to 10,
or which is all one, as 45 Roman Letters is to 50
Italick Letters: So that if a Measure holds 45 Roman
Letters, the same Measure will hold 50 Italick
Letters.
As Italick is thinner than Roman, so the English
Face is thicker than the Roman; wherefore if he
meets with the English Face, he considers that
accordingly.
I find the proportion to be as 40 to 43, viz. 40
English Faced Letters fill the same Measure that 43
Roman does; and consequently for every 40 Lines
to be Set in English he must Count off 43 Lines;
and so proportionaply for more or less.
But yet I shall not deliver these my Observations
on the Italick and English to hold thus in all Italicks
and Englishes, nor all Romans of the same Body to
be of an equal Thickness, because some are Cut
Thicker or Thinner on the Face: And besides,
sometimes Letter Cast, though in the same Matrices,
are by the Founder Cast Thicker or Thinner, and
consequently in either Circumstance Drive-out or
Get-in: Wherefore a Compositer will consider what
Fount of Letter it is he Works on, and accordingly
Count off his Copy.
Papering up of Pages, or Papering up of Letter,
are two phrases indifferently used for the same meaning.
Though this Operation seems so sleight and
trivial that it may be thought not worth mentioning,
yet it being a task incumbent on the Compositer,
it becomes mine too to shew how it is performed.
It is thus: When a Book is finisht, and the Compositer
is to Work on other Letter afterwards; the
Wrought off Letter is to be Papered up. The Press-man
therefore having Washt the Wrought-off Forms,
the Compositer Rinces them, as was shewed in Section
22. ¶ 3. He Rinces the Letter as well as if it were
Rinced for present use, or rather better: for else the
Inck that is desolved among the Ly would, with long
standing by, harden between the Letter, and make
the Letter stick so fast together that when it comes
afterwards to be Destributed, the Compositer shall not
without great difficulty and trouble get them asunder.
This sticking together of the Letter is call’d Baking
of the Letter. And Compositers in this Case say,
The Letter is Bak’d.
The Compositer having Stript the Form, whips Cords
as tight as he can about every Page, not to Tye them
up for good and all, but aswell to keep up the Letter
on the sides of the Pages that it fall not down, while
it stands by for some dayes on the Letter-board to Dry,
as to keep the Letter tight together that he may the
better with his Hands take an whole Page at once off
the Letter-board.
When it is Dry, if the Pages are not too broad for
his Grasp, he places his Body against a side of the
Pages, and the Balls of his two Thumbs against the
side of a Page, one indifferently between the middle
and Head of the Page, and the other between the
middle and Foot of the Page, and with the three
Fore-fingers of each Hand placed on the other side
of the Page, grasps the Page between them and his
Thumbs; and to keep his Hands the steddier,
stretches the insides of his Little-fingers one against
the Head the other against the Foot of the Page:
And having the Page thus Steddy between his Hands
close prest on all the sides of the Page, he with a
quick motion nimbly rears one side of the Page upright,
and receives the weight of it either on the Balls
of his Thumbs or on the Balls of his Fingers, as best
likes him; and so carries it to his Galley and Tyes it
firmly up; as was shewed ¶ 6. of this Section.
As he took and Tyed up this one Page, so he takes
and Tyes up all the Pages. But if a Page be too big
for his Grasp, he underlays the Slice of a Galley till it
lye within a Scaboard so high as the edge of the
Letter-board, and getting some one to hold the Slice
steddy against the edge of the Letter-board he slides
the Page, with the Head or Foot forwards upon the
Slice, and so carries the Page to the Galley and Tyes
it up, as aforesaid.
He sends the Boy to the Warehouse-keeper for so
much Paper as he finds he shall want; and if the
Pages are small, he layes a single Sheet down on
the Correcting-Stone or on a Letter-board, and sets a
Page down on that Sheet of Paper, so as the farther
Side of the Page may stand towards one end of the
Sheet; and so far on the Sheet, as that the end of it
may lap over the Face of the Letter, and about half
way down the Shank of the Letter, on the hither
side the Page: And smoothing the Paper tight over
the Face of the Letter, and half way down the Shank
on the hither Side, and quite down the Shank at the
Head and Foot of the Page, he folds the loose Paper
that hangs over the ends of the Page, from each
corner of the Page, to end in an Angle in the middle
of the loose Paper, and then folds the other end
of the Sheet of Paper tight over the Paper that
covers the Face of the Letter; and also folds the
loose Paper at the ends of the Page down into Angles,
as he did the former loose ends: Then rearing
his Page over the further side, lays the Face downwards,
still smoothing the Paper tight, and folding
in the un-folded corners, to meet in the same Angles
with the former folded Angles in the middle
of the loose Paper: And thus so long as he has Paper
to spare he turns his Page, wrapping it at least
twice, or if he can thrice about in Paper, folding
and doubling down the Loose Paper into Angles as
before: And at last turns up those Angles or Lappets
either over the Face or Bottom of the Letter, and
turns the Page upon those folded Lappets, that its
weight may press and keep them close under
the Page.
If the Pages are large, so as one Sheet will not
compass them twice or thrice about, to be strong
enough to bear the Letter, which generally sinks
downwards into the middle of a Page, he lays two,
or sometimes three Sheets under the Page: And
as he wrapt up the first Lay of Sheets, adds more to
lengthen them out, that they may wrap at least
three or four times about the great Page.
Having thus Paper’d up the Pages, and folded the
Lappets under them, he writes upon the upper side
what Letter it is, viz.Long-Primer Roman, Long-Primer
Italick, Pica Roman, Pica Italick, Pica English,
English Roman, Italick, &c. and sets them
by for the Master-Printer to dispose of.
A Correcter should (besides the English Tongue)
be well skilled in Languages, especially in
those that are used to be Printed with us, viz. the
Latin, Greek, Hebrew, Syriack, Caldæ, French, Spanish,
Italian, High Dutch, Saxon, Low Dutch, Welch,
&c. neither ought my innumerating only these
be a stint to his skill in the number of them, for
many times several other Languages may happen
to be Printed, of which the Author has perhaps
no more skill than the bare knowledge of the
Words and their Pronunciations, so that the
Orthography (if the Correcter have no knowledge
of the Language) may not only be false
to its Native Pronunciation, but the Words altered
into other Words by a little wrong Spelling,
and consequently the Sense made ridiculous,
the purpose of it controvertible, and the meaning
of the Author irretrievably lost to all that shall
read it in After times.
He ought to be very knowing in Derivations
and Etymologies of Words, very sagacious
in Pointing, skilful in the Compositers whole
Task and Obligation, and endowed with a quick
Eye to espy the smallest Fault.
But I shall say no more of his Qualifications; but
suppose him endowed with all necessary accomplishments
for that Office.
The Compositer either carries him a Proof, or
sends the Boy with it to his Appartment, which
is commonly some little Closet adjoyning to the
Composing-room; And the Master-Printer appoints
him some one that is well skill’d in true and quick
Reading, to Read the Copy to him, whom I shall
call the Reader.
This Reader, as I said, Reads the Copy to him,
and the Correcter gives attention; and at the same
time carefully and vigilantly examines the Proof,
and considers the Pointing, Italicking, Capitalling,
or any error that may through mistake, or
want of Judgement be committed by the Compositer.
If he finds one Letter Set instead of another, as
in this Word tho for the, he dashes out the wrong
Letter thus thø, and Writes the Letter
it should be on the Right Hand Margin
of the Page, right against the same Line,
and makes a Dash behind it, as you may
see in the Margin.
e/
If two or three, or more Words in the
same Line have Faults in them, as in these
Words, ; where first
an o is Set instead of a, e instead of c,
t instead of r, and c instead of o: These
he marks in an orderly succession towards
the Right Hand, against the same Line,
as you may see in the Margin.
a/ c/ r/ o/
But if one word be Set instead of another,
as Scoff instead of Smile, here he
marks Scoff out thus , and writes
Smile, as in the Margin.
Smile /
If a Word or Words, or Letter, or Point
be Left out he makes this mark ʌ where
it is Left out for a mark of Insertion, and
Writes in the Margin what must come in.
If a Space be Left out he makes the former
mark of Insertion where it should
come in, and makes this mark in the
Margin.
/
If a whole Sentence be Left out, too
long to be Writ in the Margin, he makes
the mark of Insertion where it is Left out,
and only Writes (Out) in the Margin. If
the Sentence Left out be not very long,
he Writes it under the Page, or on the
Left Hand Margin of the Page:
(Out)
But if it be too large to be Writ in the
Margin, or under the Page, he
Writes in the Margin, See the Copy.
(See the Copy)
If a Word or Sentence be Set
twice, as Him Him, he marks out
one Him thus , and makes
this mark in the Margin, for Deleo,
to take out.
/
If a Letter be turned thus , he
dashes it out as you see, and makes
this mark in the Margin.
/
If Words are Transposed, that is,
if one Word stand in another
Words place, as, no I love Swearing,
and it should be, I love no
Swearing; he marks this Fault
thus, , and
makes this mark in the Margin.
The like mark he makes
in Matter and Margin if two Letters
are Transpos’d.
/
If a Space or an m or n Quadrat,
&c. stick up, and Print Black, as
between thesewords, he marks
in the Margin thus.
|
If a Word be Set in Roman Letter
instead of Italick or English Letter,
he dashes the Word underneath
thus, and Writes Ital. or
Eng. in the Margin.
Ital/ Eng/
In like manner, if a single Let-
or more Letters be Set in Roman
Letter, and it should be Italick or
English Letter; or if in English or
Italick, and it should be Roman Letter,
he dashes the Letter or Lettersthus underneath, and writes Ital.Rom. or Eng. in the Margin:
Ital/ Rom/ Eng/
Or if Lower-Case Letters be Set instead of
Capitals, he dashes them underneath,
and Writes Capt. in the Margin.
Capt./
Having Read the Matter of the Proof he examines
again if the Form be right Impos’d, for though he
before turn’d the Pages in the Proof as he read them
according to their orderly places, yet he will scarce
trust to that alone, but again examines them on
purpose, and distinctly, which he does not only by
the Direction Word, but by examining the whole Sentence
the Direction comes in, both at the end of the
Page, and the beginning of the next Page.
He examines that all the Signatures are right, and
all the Titles and Folio’s.
If the Work be large Forms and small Letter, he
has a second, and sometimes a third Proof, which
he Reads as the first.
After the Second or Third Proof he has a Revise,
which is also a Proof-sheet: He examines in this
Revise, Fault by Fault, if all the Faults he markt in
the last Proof were carefully mended by the Compositer;
if not, he marks them in the Revise.
Thus you see it behoves him to be very careful
as well as skilful; and indeed it is his own interest
to be both: For if by his neglect an Heap be spoiled,
he is obliged to make Reparation.
Advertisement to AUTHORS.
Although I have in the precedent Exercises
shew’d the Accomplishments of a good Compositer,
yet will not a curious Author trust either
to his Care or Abilities in Pointing, Italicking,
Capitalling, Breaking, &c. Therefore it
behoves an Author to examine his Copy very
well e’re he deliver it to the Printer, and to Point
it, and mark it so as the Compositer may
know what Words to Set in Italick, English,
Capitals, &c.
For his Italick Words he draws a line under
them thus: For English Words he draws two
lines under them thus; and for Capitals a line
of Pricks thus, or else draws a line with Red
Inck.
If his Copy, or any part of it, be Written in
any Foreign Language, he is strictly to spell that
Foreign Language right: Because the Compositer,
as I said in the Preface to this, takes
no notice of any thing therein but the very
Letters, Points and Characters he finds in his
Copy.
If an Author have not (through haste in Writing)
made Breaks in proper places; when he
comes to peruse his Copy he may find cause to
make several Breaks where he made none: In
such a case he makes a Crotchet [ thus, at
the Word he would have begin his new Paragraph.
Thus in all particulars he takes care to deliver
his Copy perfect: For then he may expect
to have his Book perfectly Printed. For
by no means he ought to hope to mend it in the
Proof, the Compositer not being obliged to
it: And it cannot reasonably be expected he
should be so good Natured to take so much pains
to mend such Alterations as the second Dictates
of an Author may make, unless he be very well
paid for it over and above what he agreed for with
the Master-Printer.
The next Exercises (God willing) shall be
the Press-mans Trade, The Office of the
Ware-house-keeper, The Customs of the Chapel,
And a Dictionary to explain the hard Words
and Phrases used in the whole Practice of
Typography: Which will be the Conclusion
of this Second Volume.
ADVERTISEMENT.
There is now coming forth a small Book, intituled
Enneades Arithmeticæ; the Numbring Nines, or
Pythagoras his Table, extended to all Whole Numbers
under 10000. And the Numbring Rods of
the Right Honourable John Lord Nepeer, enlarged
with 9999 Fixt Columns or Rods, of Single, Double,
Triple and Quadruple Figures, and with a new
sort of Double and Movable Rods, for the much
more sure, plain and easie performance of Multiplication,
Division, and Extraction of Roots. The
whole being very useful for most Persons, of whatsoever
Calling and Employment, in all Arts and
Sciences: All having frequent Occasions of Accompts,
Numbring, Measuring, Surveying, Gauging,
Weighing, Demonstrating, &c. The Divine
Wisdom having from the Beginning Disposed all
things in Measure, Number and Weight, Sap. 11. 21.
Printed for Joseph Moxon, at the Sign of Atlas
in Ludgate-street. Where also these Numbring Rods,
(commonly call’d Napier’s Bones) are made and
sold.
The Press-mans Trade. — PREFACE. — §. 24. ¶. 1. Of the Press-mans Trade . — ¶ 2. Of Laying or Bedding the Stone. — ¶ 3. Of Setting the Rounce. — ¶ 4. Of Hanging the Plattin. — ¶ 5. Of Justifying the Head. — ¶ 6. Of Oyling the Iron Work of the Press. — ¶ 7. Of Making Register, and Making Ready a Form. — ¶ 8. Of Drawing the Tympans and Frisket. — ¶ 9. Of Wetting Paper. — ¶ 10. Of Knocking up the Balls. — ¶ 11. Of Rubbing out Inck. — ¶ 12. Of Destributing the Balls. — ¶ 13. Of Beating. — ¶ 15. Of Pulling. — ¶ 16. Of Printing Red, or other Colours with Black. — ¶ 17. Of mixing and Grinding Colours with Varnish. — ¶ 18. Of Printing with Gold and Silver. — ¶ 19. Rules observed; and Remedies to the Inconveniences the Press-man may meet with in a Train of Work . — § 25. The Office of the Warehouse-keeper. — ¶ 1. Of Hanging up Paper . — ¶ 2. Of Laying the Heaps. — ¶ 3. Of Gathering of Books. — ¶ 4. Of Colationing Books. — ¶ 5. Of Setting out Paper , and Culling the Cording Quires. — ( As an Appendix. ) Ancient Customs used in a Printing-house.
The Printing-Press that a Press-man works
at, is a Machine invented upon mature consideration
of Mechanick Powers, deducted from
Geometrick Principles; and therefore a Press-man
indowed with a competency of the Inventers Genius,
will not only find great satisfaction in the contemplation
of the harmonious design and Make of a Press, but as
often as any Member, or part of it is out of order, he
will know how to remedy any deficiency in it. This
alone will intitle him to be an Understanding Press-man:
But his care and serious industry in the Physical
and Manual performance of his Task, must give him the
Reputation of a good and curious Work-man.
An understanding Press-man therefore knows
not only how to direct a Printers Joyner to
Set up and Fasten a Press when it is made, but also
how to give a strange Joyner and Smith instructions
how to make a Press, and all its parts, in a
Symetrical proportion to any unwonted size, if in
a strange place he shall have occasion to use it.
I have already at large insisted upon the dimensions
of every particular Member of an ordinary
siz’d Press in § 10, 11. But in those Sections did
omit shewing you how the Press is Set up and Fastned;
yet promised to do it when I came to the
Press-mans Trade: It being not only a care incumbent
upon him, but a Curiosity he would assume to
himself to direct and see the Joyner set and fasten it
in a Steddy and practical position. We will suppose a
strange Joyner, and not a Printers Joyner (as here
in London he may be furnisht with) who generally
by their constant conversation in Printers work,
do or ought to know as much of Setting up a Press
as the Press-man himself.
The Joyner therefore having set together the
Frame, viz. the Cheeks, Feet, Cap, Head, Till,
Winter, Hind-Posts, Ribs, Carriage, &c. The Press-man
directs, and sees him perform as follows by and
by. For I should have told you that before the Head
is put into its place, the Press-man besmears the
whole Tennanted ends and Tennants well with
Soap or Grease, and also the Mortesses the Head
slides in, and so much of the Cheeks as the ends of
the Head work against, that the Head may the
easier work up and down.
He also before the Carriage is laid on the Ribs,
besmears the two edges of the Plank and the under
side of the Coffin well with Soap or Grease; and the
like he does by the inside of the Wooden Ribs, that
they may slide the easier beside each other.
Now to return to the Joyner. The Press-man,
I say, directs and sees him perform as follows.
1. To place the Feet upon an Horizontal Level
Floor, as I shewed in the First Volume, Numb. 7.
§ 7. when I spoke of the Level that Carpenters
use.
2. To erect the Cheeks perpendicularly upright,
as I shewed Vol. 1. Numb. 7. § 8. when I treated of
the Plumb-line.
3. To place the Stays or Braces so as the Press
may be kept in the most Steddy and Stable position,
as well to give a check to the force of the hardest
Pull he makes, as to the hardest Knock the Bar
shall make against the farther Cheek, if by chance
(as sometimes it does) it slip out of the Press-mans
Hand.
This consideration may direct him to place one
Brace against the end of the Cap that hangs over the
hither Cheek, and in a range parallel with the fore
and hind side of the Cap: For the more a Brace
stands aslope to the two parrallel sides, the less it
resists a force offered to the end of them, viz. the
hither end of the Cap, which is one main Stay to the
whole Press.
If he place another Brace against the hinder corner
of the farther end of the Cap, it will resist the Spring
of the Bar, if it slip out of the Press-mans Hand.
And if he places two other Braces, one against the
hither corner of the hind-side of the Cap, and the
other against the farther corner of the fore-side of
the Cap, the Press will be sufficiently Braced-up, if
the Room will afford convenience to place the farther
end of the Braces against.
By convenience I mean a firm solidity to place
the end of the Braces against, be it either a Stone-wall,
Brick-wall, or some principal Post, or a Girder,
&c. that will not start or tremble at the force
of a Pull.
The Braces ought to be straight, and of Substance
strong enough proportionable to their Length:
And if convenience will allow it to be fixed in such a
position that they stand in the same straight Line
with the upper Surface of the Cap, viz. that the
farther end of the Brace neither dips lower or
mounts higher than the upper side of the Cap. Neither
ought the Brace, though thus posited, to stand
aslope or askew, viz. make unequal angles with
the side of the Cap it is fastned to, but it ought to
stand Square, and make right angles with the respective
side of the Cap; because in those Positions
the Braces best resists the force of continued
Pulls.
But though this be by the Rules of Architecture,
the strongest, firmest, and most concise method for
Bracing-up a Press, yet will not the Room the Press
is to stand in always admit of convenience to place
the Braces thus: Therefore the Press-man ought to
consider the conveniences of the Room, both for the
places to fit the Braces to, and the positions to set
the Braces in; placing his Braces as correspondent
as he can to these Rules.
If he doubt the crazy make of the Winter, he
will cause two Battens of three or four Inches broad,
and a full Inch thick, to be nailed close to the outer
sides of the Feet of the Press, which will both
strengthen the Winter, and keep the lower part of
the Cheeks from flying out, and also hinder the
Press from working into a twisting Position.
And though I am loath to name the Under-laying
of the Feet, because at the best it is but a Botch,
and Subjects the whole Press to an unstable position
yet because by accident it may happen, the aforesaid
Battens will also keep these Underlays from working
out.
Joyners that Work to Printers have got a Custom
to place a strong Piece of Timber between the middle
of the Cap and the Ceiling or Roof of the Room,
which can do no service there, unless they intend to
support the Roof: For the weight of the Press alone
will keep it close to the Floor, and the strength of
Stuff between the Mortesses in the Cheeks and the
ends of them, are intended to be made strong enough
to resist the Rising of the Head: For should that
strength of Stuff start, neither their strong Piece of
Timber, nor the strength of the Roof, would resist
the Rising of the Head: but Head and Cap, and
Timber and Roof too, would all start together, as
by experience I have seen. For indeed the strength
of Stuff between the Mortesses that the Tennants of
the Head works in, and the upper ends of the Cheeks,
and the Strength of Stuff between the Mortesses
that the Tennants of the Winter lyes in, and the
lower ends of the Cheeks resist the whole strength of
the working of the Spindle out of its Nut. So that
the Cap suffers no pressure upwards or the Feet downwards,
unless the force of the Spindle break the
strength of Stuff between the Head and the upper
ends of the Cheeks, or the strength of Stuff between
the Winter and the lower ends of the Cheeks.
The Press being thus far fastned, the Carriage is
laid on; and if the Joyner performed his Work well
in making the Wooden-work, it will at first lye exactly
Horizontal; if not, it must be mended where
it is amiss before the Press-man can Lay the Stone;
and before the Stay of the Carriage can be fitted under
the end of the Ribs.
We will suppose the Wooden Ribs to lye on the
Winter exactly, flat and Horizontal, therefore the
Press-man now Lays the Stone: If the Stone be a
good thick Marble Stone, and all the way of an
equal thickness between the Face and the Bottom,
he may Bed or Lay it upon so many large Sheets
of Brown Paper as will raise the Face about a Brevier
above the Superficies of the Coffin, and the
Stone will do good service.
Or he may Bed or Lay it on Bran; which indeed
the Press-man most commonly does, if the Stone be
qualified as aforesaid.
The manner how he lays it on Bran is thus,
He grasps an handful of Bran and lays it down at
the hither corner of the Coffin on his Left Hand, and
it will form it self into a small Hillock; then he
takes another handful of Bran, and lays that down
in the same manner near the first, towards the further
side, and so a third, &c. towards the further
side, till he have filled the whole breadth of the
Coffin. Then he in like manner lays another row
of Hillocks, beginning at the hither side of the
Coffin; and so a third and fourth row, &c. till the
length of the Coffin is filled as well as the breadth:
Then with a Riglet he drives the tops of these
Hillocks into the Valleys between them, to spread
the Bran into an equal thickness in the whole Coffin.
Which done, he lays the Stone upon it.
But in this case he considers to lay so much Bran
thus into the Coffin as may make the Face of the
Stone rise about a Great Primer higher than the Superficies
of the Coffin: For else he must take all his
Bran out again, and new-lay his Hillocks, making
them bigger or less, till he have fitted the Face of
the Stone, to lye about a Great Primer, as aforesaid,
higher than the Superficies of the Coffin.
But if it be a thin Stone, or a Purbeck or Portland
Stone, it is great odds if it be thus Laid, but it
breaks with the first Pull: Therefore these Stones
are generally Laid or Bedded with Plaister of Paris,
which before it hardens, will of it self run into an
Horizontal position.
This Plaister of Paris is tempered with fair Water
to the consistence of Batter for Pancakes, or
somewhat thicker, and such a quantity is put into
the Coffin as may raise the Face of the Stone about a
Scaboard higher than the Superficies of the Coffin.
The different matter the Stone is Laid on is the
reason why the Face is Laid of different heights
above the Superficies of the Coffin: For by the force
of a Pull about a dozen Sheets of Brown Paper may
be squeez’d closer by a Brevier Body, which brings
the Face of the Stone into the same Level with the
Superficies of the Coffin. And Bran squeezes much
more. But Plaister of Paris not at all.
When he Lays the Stone on Bran, or on Plaister of
Paris, he and his Companions slings the Stone in
two strong Packthreds, placing one towards either
end of the Stone; and each of them taking an end
of each String in each of their Hands, with the
Face of the Stone upwards, and brought as near as
they can into an Horizontal Position, they with
great care and caution let it into the Coffin, and as
near as they can, so as the whole bottom of the
Stone touch the Bedding all at once; lest by raking
the Bedding with any part of the bottom of the
Stone first, the Horizontal form of the Bedding be
broken.
Having laid the Stone down, they draw the Packthred
from under it: And by squeezing a little Water
out of a Spunge upon about the middle of the Face
of the Stone, try whether the Stone lye truly Horizontal,
which they know by the standing of the
Water: For if the Water delate it self equally about
the middle of the Stone, the Stone lies Horizontal:
But if it have a propensitude to one side more than
another, the declivety is on that side, and the Stone
must be new Laid.
Having laid it Horizontal, they Justifie it up with
the Justifiers I mentioned in § 11. ¶ 17.
The Rounce being well Set does not only ease a
Press-man in his Labour, but contributes much to
Riddance in a train of Work.
In the old-fashioned Presses used here in England,
the Press-man finds often great trouble and loss of
Time in Setting the Rounce: Because the Girts being
nailed to the Carriage-board behind, and to the
Frame of the Coffin before, he cannot alter the position
of the Rounce without un-nailing and nailing the
Girts again, both before and behind. Nay, and
sometimes though he thinks he has been very careful
in Winding the Girts off or on the Barrel of the
Rounce, as he finds occasion requires; Yet by straining
either of the Girts too hard, or not hard enough,
or by an accidental slip of either of the Girts, or by
stirring the Rounce out of a Set position, when he
thinks he has Set the Rounce, he has it to do again.
Besides, The Carriage-board, Frame of the Coffin,
and the Rounce-barrel, all suffer tearing to pieces by
often drawing out and driving in o Nails.
But in these new-fashioned Presses all these inconveniences
are avoided, for the Press-man, without
nailing or un-nailing, Sets the Rounce to what Position
he will, only by lifting up the Iron Clicker that
stops the wheel: For then Winding off so much Girt,
and Winding up so much Girt at the opposite end of
the Carriage, his Rounce is Set, without hope or
Hazzard.
He Sets the Rounce to such a position, that when
the fore-end of the Tympan will just lye down and
rise free, without touching the fore-edge of the Plattin,
then a line drawn or imagined from the Axis
of the Handle of the Rounce, to a Perpedicular or
Plumb-line, let fall from the Axis of the Spindle of
the Rounce, these two lines shall make an angle of
about 45 degrees, which is half the Elevation between
an Horizontal line, or Line of Level, and a
Perpendicular, or Plumb-line.
When the Press-man Hangs the Plattin, he lays a
Form upon the Press, and about a Quire of Paper
doubled upon it (this Quire of Paper thus doubled is
called the Cards) then layes the Plattin upon the
Cards, and so Runs the Carriage and Plattin in, till
the middle of the Plattin lye just under the Toe of
the Spindle: Then he puts the Pan of the Plattin in
its place, and in part Justifies the Head, as shall be
shewed in the next ¶. And he un-screws the Hose-screws,
till the Spuares at the ends of the Hose come
down to about a quarter of an Inch of the Square of
the Socket they are fitted into in the ends of the Garter,
and when the Toe of the Spindle is fitted into
the Nut in the Pan of the Plattin, he examines by
straining a Pack-thred against the two foresides of
the Cheeks of the Press, whether the fore-edge of the
Plattin is set in a parallel Range with the fore-sides
of the Cheeks: If it be not, he twists the ends till the
edge of the Plattin stands parallel with the Pack-thred,
and consequently with the Cheeks.
Then with the Bar he Pulls the Spindle hard down
upon the Plattin, and Sets the edges of a Paper-board
between the Bar and the farther Cheek of the Press,
to keep the Bar from starting back.
And having provided fine Whip-cord, he knots
a Noose on one end and puts it over one of the Hooks
of the Plattin, lashing the Whip-cord also upon the
farthermost Notch of the Hose-hook, and again upon
the Plattin-hook, and again upon the Hose-hook,
and again upon the Plattin-hook: So that here is now
three Lashes of whip-cord upon the Plattin-hook, and
upon the farthermost Notch of the Hose-hook. Wherefore
he Lashes his fourth Lashing of whip-cord now
upon the second Notch, viz. the middlemost Notch
of the Hose-hook, reiterating these Lashes on the
middlemost Notch and Plattin-hook also three times.
And thus in like manner Lashes also three Lashes
upon the third and last Notch of the Hose-hook and
also of the Plattin-hook, observing to draw every
Lashing of an equal strength.
Then he begins to whip about these Lashings to
draw them close together: He begins, I say, at
at the bottom of the Lashings, viz. close above the
Plattin-hook, and draws his whippings very tight and
hard, and contiguous above one another, till he have
whipt so near the top of the Lashings, viz. near
the Hose-hooks that he finds the Lashings (which
now spread wide asunder because the Notches of the
Hose-hooks stands far asunder) will yield no longer to
to his whiping and pulling: So that now he fastens
his whip-cord with two or three hard knots, and
cuts it from the Coyl.
In like manner he begins at the opposite diagonal
corner of the Plattin, and lashes and whips that:
And also the two other corners of the Plattin as he
did the first, carefully observing to draw all his lashings
and whippings of an equal strength, lest any
corner of the Plattin either mount or dip.
If he finds he strained the whip-cord not hard
enough; or (when he is in his train of work) that
the Plattin-cords with long working work loose;
or that the Toe of the Spindle and the Nut it works
in, have worn one another; he by turning the
Screws at the upper ends of the Hose, draws up the
Nut of the Plattin closer to the Toe of the Spindle,
and by consequence strains the Plattin-cords tighter
up; which is also a great convenience in these new-fashioned
Presses: For, for any of these aforesaid accidents
the Press-man that works at our English-Presses
must new Hang his Plattin: When (as aforesaid)
in these new Presses he only turns about a
Screw.
Justifying the Head is to put into the Mortesses in
the Cheeks between the upper sides of the Tennants of
the Head, and the upper sides of the Mortesses in the
Cheeks, an equal and convenient thickness of (either)
square pieces of Felt, Pastboards, or Scaboards (some
or all of them) that when the Press-man Pulls, the
Tennants of the Head shall have an equal Horizontal
level Check.
In Justifying the Head, the Pull is to be made Longer
or Shorter.
If the Press-man be tall and strong and his work
be Light, that is, a small Form and great Letter,
which needs not so strong a Pull as a Large Form and
small Letter, he covets to have a Short-pull; that
is, that the Spindle shall give an Impression by that
time the Bar comes but about half way to the hither
Cheek (in Printers Language Down.)
But if the Press-man be low, and not very strong,
he will require a Longer Pull, especially if the work
be Heavy, viz. a Large Form and small Letter:
Because the heighth of the Bar is generally made to
lye at the command of a reasonable Tall man, and
therefore a Low man cannot Pull the Handle of the
Bar at so great a force at Arms-end as a Tall man; but
will require the swinging of his whole Body backwards
to add force to the Pull: So that if the Pull be
not Longer, he cannot fall enough backwards to get
the Handle of the Bar within his command and force.
And therefore a Low man and Heavy Work requires a
long and Soaking Pull.
A long or a Soaking or Easie Pull, is when the
Form feels the force of the Spindle by degrees, till the
Bar comes almost to the hither Cheek of the Press,
and this is also call’d a Soft Pull; because it comes
Soft and Soakingly and easily down: And for the
contrary reason the Short Pull is call’d an Hard Pull,
because it is suddenly perform’d.
That which makes a Hard Pull, is putting into
the Mortesses in the Cheeks solid Blocks of Wood,
which will scarce Squeeze by the Strength of a Pull:
And that which causes a Soft Pull is putting in
pieces of Felt or Pastboard (as aforesaid) which being
Soft will Squeeze and retain their Spring for a considerable
time, yet will at length grow hard with
Working, and then the Pull grows Longer; which
the Press-man mends, by putting in another Felt or
Pastboard into each Mortess.
The Head cannot be conveniently and well Justifyed
soon after the laying of the Stone, if it be Laid
on Bran, because though the Force of the Spindle
will at the immediate time of the Pull Squeeze the
Bran in the Coffin close, yet so soon as the force of
the Spindle is off the Bran, all its dry parts, by their
several irregular positions, will like so many Springs,
at the same moment of time endeavour to recover
their Natural tendency, and heaves the Stone upwards
again: So that generally for a day or two
Working the Stone will not lye Solid, though at
length through the often and constant Squeezing the
Bran it will. But if the Stone be Laid on Brown Paper,
or Plaister of Paris, it quickly finds a Solid Foundation.
When the Press-man Justifies the Head, he unscrews
the Female Screws of the Head Screws, that
the weight of the Head may draw it down, to make
room to put the Justifyers into the Mortesses in the
Cheeks; and when he has put in so many as he
thinks convenient, he Screws up the Head again as
hard as he can. Then lays the Cards on the Form, on
the Press, and Runs in the Carriage under the Plattin,
and Pulls hard upon it, while his Companion
Screws up the Head as hard and tight as he can, that
the Carriage, Tympan, &c. may Run the freelier
under the Plattin.
The Ribs, the Tympan Joynts, the Frisket Joynts,
the Garters, both ends of the Rounce-Spindle,
the Nut and Spindle, and the Toe of the Spindle,
are all to be well Oyl’d; that they may all perform
their several offices the easier, lightlier and nimbler;
both Upper and Under hand.
All but the Nut and Spindle, and Toe of the Spindle,
are Oyl’d with a Feather dipt in a spoonful, or
little Pot, or Oyster-shell, &c. of Sallad Oyl; and
that feather dabb’d upon so much of the Ribs as he can
come at, at either end of the Press: For then by
Running the Carriage three or four times quick Out
and In, it desperses the Oyl equally the whole length
of the Ribs, and at the same time Oyls the Cramp-Irons.
And for Oyling the Joynts, he commonly takes
out the Pins and Oyls them, and puts them in
again; and with the edge of a Feather dabs a
little Oyl between the Crevices of the Joynts.
He thrusts the Feather in between the Spindle of
the Rounce and its Collers.
To Oyl the Nut and Spindle, he pours a good
quantity of Oyl in at the Hole in the Head, and
with a Cork stops the hole again to keep out dust
and filth: Then drawing the Bar quick to and fro
about half a score times, he works the Oyl equally
about the Nut and Spindle.
To Oyl the Toe of the Spindle, he pours about a
Spoonful of Oyl into the Plattin-pan.
A curious Press-man will take care that against the
Compositer brings a Form to the Press his Press-stone be
wip’d very clean; for if any (though small) hard extuberant
matter lye on it, the Letter that lyes on
that extuberant matter will, with Pulling, quickly
Rise, and not only Print harder than the rest of the
Form, but bear the force of the Plattin off of the Letters
adjacent to it. And therefore many times a
Press-man will receive the Form from the Compositer
when he has only Set the Form on the side of its
Chase upon the Press-stone, that he may be the Surer
the Face of the Stone is clean when he layes the Form
down; as also that he may carefully examine that
the backside of the Form is clean before he goes about
to make Register, or otherwise make ready his Form.
Making Register is to Quoin up a Form and otherwise
alter Whites (if need be) between the Crosses and
Pages: So as that when a second Form of the same
Volumne, Measure and Whites, is plac’d in the same
position, all the Sides of each Page shall fall exactly
upon all the Sides of the Pages of the first Form.
The first process a Press-man makes towards this
Operation, is the chusing and placing of his Points:
For to large Paper he chuses Short Shanked Points,
and to small Paper Long Shanked Points, and
proportionable to intermediate sizes of Paper:
For his Points ought to be placed so as that when he
is in his Train of work, they prick the Point-holes
within the grasp of the hollow between his hand,
Thumb, and Fore-finger; because when he shall
Work the Reteration he may the better manage and
Command the sheet he lays on the Tympan and Points.
Nor will he place his Points too near the edge of
the Paper, because when he Works the Reteration,
he would be forc’d to carry his furthermost Point-hole
the further from him, which in a long train of
Work loses Time: For the Laying Sheets quickly
on their Point-holes adds much to riddance. So
also the less distance between the further and hither
Point-hole makes more riddance than if they are far
distant; because he must draw his Body so much
the further back to place that Hole on its Point.
Therefore he places the hither Point farther into
the Paper than the farther Point, if it be Folio,
Quarto or Octavo, but to Twelves equally distant
from both edges of the Paper.
By placing the Points unequally from the edges
of the Paper, as in Folio’s, Quarto’s and Octavo’s (as
aforesaid) he also secures himself the more from a
Turn’d Heap when he works the Reteration; because
without very much altering the Quoins, he
shall not be able to make Register: And Press-men
(especially if they Work upon the same sort of
Work) seldom or never remove the Quoins on the
further side the Carriage, nor on the right hand end
of the Carriage, but let them lye as gages for the
next Form: For thrusting the Chase close against
these Quoins, the Register is almost (if not quite)
made: The Compositer having before, according to his
Task, chosen the Chases exactly of an equal size, and
made strait and equal Whites between the Crosses, &c.
Having chosen his Points, he places them so that
they may both stand in a straight line parallel with
the top and bottom sides of the Tympan; which to
know, he strains a Packthred cross the whole Tympan,
laying it at once upon the middle of the Heads
of both the Point-Screws, (for we will suppose the
Joyner hath made the Mortesses into which the Point
Screws are Let, parrallel with both the ends of the
Tympan) then if both the Points stand in that straight
line they are parrallel, if not, he moves one or both
of them upwards or downwards till they do, and
then Screws them fast.
Then he layes the Tympan down upon the Form,
holding the Frisket-end of it in his Left-hand,
about an Inch or an Inch and a half above the Face
of the Letter, and Sinks his Body downwards till
he can see between the Form and Tympan, and with
the Ball of the middle finger of his Right-hand
presses a little gently upon the Tympan just over the
Point-ends of each Point successively, to see if the
Points fall in or near the middle of the Slits in the
Short-Cross. If they fall exactly in the middle of
those Slits, the Form lyes right between the middle
of both the ends: If they fall not exactly in the
middle of both these Slits, he moves the Form between
the ends of the Carriage, till they do, and
then Quoins up the two ends of the Chase.
Then laying the Tympan flat down upon the Form,
he layes the Blankets in it: (They are call’d the
Blankets though generally it is but one Blanket
doubled:) Then he puts the Iron-Pins, fastned
through the hither side of the Inner Tympan into the
Holes made through the hither side of the outer
Tympan for Gages: And turning about the Tongues of
the Iron-Buttons, that are fitted into the outer Side of
the outer Tympan over the upper Side of the Inner-Tympan,
he Screws the Button fast down. He also
Screws down the Iron-Button at the end of the Tympan.
These Buttons thus Screwed down are to keep
the Inner-Tympan fast in, that it Spring not upwards.
Then he Folds a sheet of the Paper he is to Work
long-ways, and broad-ways, and lays the long
Crease of it upon the middle of the Long-Cross; and
the Short Crease over the middle of the Gutters of
the Short-Cross, if the Short-Cross lye in the middle
of the Form, (for in Twelves it does not, but
then he guesses at the middle;) then wetting his
Tympan (as shall in proper place be shewed) he turns
it down upon the Paper, and Running in the Carriage,
Pulls that Sheet, which with the force of the Pull
now the Tympan is wet, will stick to the Tympan;
and turning up the Tympan again sees how well the
Sheet was laid; that is, how even it was Laid: For
if it was laid even on the Form, the Margin about
the out sides of all the outer Pages will be equal;
But if the Sheet be not laid even, he lifts it up Side
by Side till he have loosen’d it from the Tympan,
and removes it by his discretion till it be laid even:
And then Pulls again upon it to fasten it to the Tympan.
This Sheet is call’d the Tympan-sheet.
Then he lays another Sheet even upon the Tympan-sheet,
for a Register Sheet, and a Waste Sheet
over that to keep it clean from any filth the Face of
the Letter may have contracted and imprint upon it,
and Pulls these two Sheets. Then he Runs out the
Carriage, and takes up the Tympan, and takes off the
two Sheets, laying the waste Sheet by: But turns
the other Side of the Register-Sheet the proper way
his Volumne requires, viz. end-ways if it be Octavo
or Folio; or Side-ways if Twelves or Quarto, &c.
as at large you see in the Section of Imposing. And
laying the Point-holes in the Register-Sheet over the
Points, lays his waste Sheet on again, Runs-in the
Carriage, and Pulls upon that the Second side of the
Register-sheet, to try how well the Impression of the
Sides of all the Pages agree, and lye upon the Impression
in the first Pull’d Side. If he finds they agree
perfectly well, Register is made. But if the Impression
of the last Pull’d Side of the Register-sheet
stand be-hither the Impression of the first Pull’d side,
either the whole length of the Sheet or part, he observes
how much it stands be-hither: If the thickness
of a Scaboard, a Nomparell, a Long-Primmer, &c. he
loosens the Quoin or Quoins on the farther side of the
Carriage, and opens one or both of them, viz. removes
them backwards till they stand a Scaboard, a
Nomparell, a Long Primmer, &c. off the sides of
their respective Corners: Then Knocks up one or
both the opposite Quoins, till he have removed the
Chase, and the Chase by consequence has forc’d the
opened Quoin or Quoins close against their Corners.
Or if the Impression of the last Pulled Side, stands
within the Impression of the first Pulled Side; he
observes how much also; and Loosning the hither
Quoin or Quoins, and Knocking up the opposite as
before, makes Register, for the Sides of the Sheet.
Then he observes how the Register of the Head
and Foot agrees. And if he finds it agrees on both
sides the Short Cross, he has good Register; supposing
the Compositer has performed his Office, viz. made
all his Pages of an equal Length, &c.
If the Impression of the Last Pulled Sheet, lye
without the Impression of the first Pulled Sheet, towards
the upper or lower end of the Tympan, he
opens the Quoins at the respective end, and Knocks-up
the opposite till he have made Register: Which to
try he Pulls another clean Register-sheet as before.
And if he finds Register agree on all the Sides of the
Form the Task is performed: If not, he mends as
aforesaid till it do.
But it sometimes happens that the Compositer has
not made an exact equal White between all the sides
of the Crosses: In this case, altering the Quoins will
not make good Register; wherefore the Press-man
observes which side has too much or too little White;
and unlocking the Form takes out or puts in such a
number of Scaboards as he thinks will make good
Register: which he tryes by Pulling a Sheet, and if
need be, mending as before, till he have Pull’d a
Sheet with good Register.
Although the Press-man have made Register, yet he
must further Make Ready the Form before he can go
to Work upon it. Under this phrase of Making
Ready the Form is comprehended many Considerations,
leading to several various Operations; For
first, The Frisket must be Cut: which to perform,
the Press-man fits the Match-Joynts of the Frisket
into the Match-Joynts of the Tympan, and pins them
in with the Frisket-pins: And having Beaten the Form,
turns down the Frisket and Tympan on the Form.
And having also Rubbed the Blankets to soften them,
lays them smooth and even in the Outer-Tympan, and
Pins the Inner Tympan in upon them, as was shewed
in the beginning of this ¶, and Pulls as before, and
as shall farther be shewed in ¶ 15. upon the bare
Frisket.
Then he Runs out the Carriage, and takes up the
Tympan and Frisket together off the Form and lays
them on the Gallows; Then takes the Frisket-pins out
again, and takes off the Frisket: And laying it flat
on a Paper-board, with the point of a Pen-knife cuts
through the Frisket about all the Sides of each Page,
allowing to each Page he thus cuts out of the Friket
about a Nomparil Margin on all the sides of the cut
cut Pages: Then he puts and pins his Frisket again
on the Tympan, as before.
2dly, He takes care that the Tympan be well Wet;
which he does by squeezing Water out of a Spunge
on the backside of it, till it be well Wet all over, and
well soak’d and limber.
3dly, That the Form be well and fast Lock’d up.
4thly, That no Letters or Spaces lye in the White-lines
of the Form; which may happen if the Compositer
have Corrected any thing since the Form was laid on
the Press, and the Compositer through oversight
pickt them not all up.
5thly, If any Wooden Letters or other Cuts be in
the Form, that they be exactly Letter-high: If not,
(for it seldom happens they are) he must make
them so; If they are too Low, (as they generally
be) he Under-lays them: But first He examines how
much they are too Low, by laying one Card or one
Scaboard or two Scaboards, or a Scaboard and a
Card, &c. upon the Face of the Wooden Cut, and
gently feeling with the Balls of the Fingers of his
right Hand if the intended Under-lay, viz. the Scaboard,
Card, &c. lye exactly even with the Face of
the Letter, If it do not, he tries thicker or thinner
Under-lays till he have evened the Under-lay with
the Face of the Letter: For then the Balls of his Fingers
will go smoothly and equally over the Under-lay
and the Face of the Letter, as if they were one
and the same Superficies.
Having evened his Under-lay, he Unlocks that
Quarter it is in, and takes the Wooden Cut out of the
Form, and cutting a Scaboard or Card or what it
wants a little smaller than the bottom of his Wooden
Cut, he lays it into the place he took the Wooden
Cut out of, or else he Pasts the Under-lay on the
bottom of the Wooden Cut, and puts the Wooden Cut
into its place again upon the Under-lay. But yet he
trusts not to his Judgment altogether for the thickness
of the Underlay: But Locking up the Form again,
Pulls the Cards upon it to sink it as low as it will go,
and Beats and Pulls a Sheet to see how it pleases
him. If it be too low, which he finds by the Pale
Printing of it, he Underlays it a little more, and again
trys by Printing till it pleases him. But by no means
he lets the Cut stand too high, though but a small
matter, For then it will Print too Hard and too
Black, and deface the beauty and fairness of the Cut;
So that it may better stand about half a Card too
low, than in the least too high.
If the Wooden Cut be too high, he causes a Joyner
to Plain off some at the bottom.
6thly, If a White Page or Pages happen in a Form,
and he uses a New-drawn Frisket, then he does not
Cut out that Page: But if he Work with an Old
Frisket, and that Page is already Cut out, he Sews,
or sometimes Pastes on a Scaboard, if the Page be
not too broad, or a strong Pasteboard to the Sides
and Crosses, to cover the White-page in the Form,
that it Print not Black.
If the sides of the Pages adjacent to the White-page
Print Hard, as most commonly they do, because
the White-page is generally lower than Letter
high, so that the force of the Spindle squeezes the
yielding Paper, Tympan and Blankets below the Plain
of the Face of the Letter; and besides the force of
the Spindle falling upon the center of the Plattin,
and the Plain of the Plattin not finding resistance
to entertain it equally, presses lower down upon the
low White-page, than upon the Face of the Letter;
so that the Press-man either Underlays the White-page,
as he does Wooden Cuts, or else he fits a
Bearer on the Frisket.
The Bearer is a Riglet of a convenient thickness:
and this convenient thickness the Press-man finds as I
shewed you how he found the thickness of his Under-lays
for Wooden Cuts; only with this difference, that
as then he made his Wooden Cut exactly Letter-high,
so now he maks his Bearer and the Furniture his
Bearer bears on Letter-high: Wherefore he Pasts one
side of his Bearer, and lays it as he would have it on
the Furniture, with the Pasted side upwards; and
laying his Tympan and Frisket down upon the Form,
with his Fingers presses on the outside the Inner-Tympan
Frisket and all, upon the place where the
Beares lies; So that with the Paste the Bearer sticks
to the side of the Frisket, which he takes up again:
and if he thinks the Paste not strong enough to hold
it till the Form is wrought off, he sews it to the Frisket
by pricking his Needle on both sides the Bearer, and
lashing the Thred over it so often till he thinks it
fast enough sew’d on.
7thly, He examines whether the FrisketBites not:
That is, whether no part of it Print upon any of the
sides of any of the Pages: if they do he cuts away so
much and about a Nomparel more off the Frisket
where it Bites.
8thly. He examines if the Beards of the Letter
Print at the Feet of the Pages: If they do, He considers
whether the too short or too far Running in of
the Carriage causes it. Or whether it be only the
Beard of a short Page that Prints; If it be the Beard
of a short Page that Prints, he remedies it with an
Under-lay as I shewed he did in the White Page.
If the Carriage be Run in too short, and the Feet
of the Pages stand towards the Plattin, the Hind-side
of the Plattin will press strong upon the Feet of
those Pages: And if the Carriage be Run in too far,
the Feet of the Pages that stand towards the hinder
Rail of the Tympan will most feell the force of Plattin,
and according to a greater or less proportion of that
force, and to the softness or yielding of the Paper,
Tympan, and Blankets, and all other Springs in the
Press, mentioned in §. 11. ¶ 1. of this Volumne, the
Feet of the Pages and Beard of the Letter will more
or less Print Hard.
Wherefore in this case he Runs the Carriage under
the Plattin, till the farther Edge of the Plattin just
cover the Feet of those Pages, and with a piece of
Chalk makes a White stroke over the Board of the
hither side of the Carriage behind, and the upper
side of the Rail of the Ribs: Then he Runs in the
Carriage again, till the Foreside of the Plattin just
cover the Feet of the Pages next the Hind Rail of the
Tympan, and makes another mark with Chalk on the
Rail of the Ribs to joyn with the mark he first made
on the Board of the Carriage. Then he Runs out the
Carriage, and lays the Tympan down on the Form;
and Runs in the Carriage again till he joyn the mark
or line he made first on the Carriage-board and Rail
of the Ribs, and makes a mark with Chalk on the
farther Rail of the Tympan just range with the Foreside
of the Plattin. This mark on the Tympan shews
him how far he must Run the Carriage in against the
Fore-edge of the Plattin for the First Pull. Then he
Runs in the Carriage farther, till he joyn the same
Mark or Line on the Carriage-board to the second
Mark he made on the Rail of the Ribs, and makes
another Mark on the further Rail of the Tympan just
range with the Fore-side of the Plattin, for the Mark
he is no Run the Carriage in to against the Fore-edge
of the Plattin, for his Second Pull.
9thly, He Examines if the Catch of the Bar will
hold the Bar when the Spindle makes a small Spring,
viz. When the Bar flies but a little way back from
the pressure of the Form: If it will not, he knocks
up the Catch a little higher till it will, and then Screws
the Screw on the Shank, and consequently the Catch
close and firm against the Cheek of the Press.
But if the Catch stand too high, so that it will not
without a great Spring, (viz. when the Bar is Pull’d
hard from the farther Cheek) fly up; He then knocks
upon the top of the Catch to sink it lower; And
when it is well fitted Screws it up again, as before.
If the Catch of the Bar stand too Low, it will not
hold the Bar; But it will Come down again of it self
when he is in his train of Work: For if, as it often
happens, he lets the Bar fly harder than ordinary
back, or if it slip out of his Hand, it will knock hard
against the Cheek, and Spring back again.
If the Catch of the Bar stand but a little too High,
the Violence of the Bars flying back to make it stick
on the Catch will soon Loosen the Square of the Bar
in the Eye of the Spindle; and indeed subject the
whole Press to an unstable condition.
This is another ease and convenience these New-fashioned
Presses gives the Press-man: For in the Old
make of the Press, when the Catch of the Bar holds
too hard, or too soft, he is troubled to Raise or Sink
the Catch with the thickness of Scaboards, which being
indevisable, does not without trouble or luck
justen it to an exact Heighth. And besides, These
Under-lays being but put under the Catch upon the
Wooden Bearer without any Fastning, are very subject
to work out by the constant disturbance the
motion of the several Parts of the Press (when at
work) gives it: Or else (which is worse) he many
times is forced to batter the Cheek of the Press, with
drawing and driving of Nails out and in it, to fit
on another Catch bigger or lesser, whereas here
with a softer or an harder knock of the Hammer
(as aforesaid) he Raises or Sinks the Catch, and afterwards
Screws it firmly up.
10thly, He considers whether the Stay of the
Frisket stands neither too forwards or too backwards.
The Stay may stand too forwards, though when it is
leisurely turn’d up it stays the Frisket: Because, when
the Press-man is in a Train of Work, though he
generally throws the Frisket quick up with an accustomed,
and as he intends, equal strength; yet if
his guess at strength in throwing it up varies, and it
comes (though but a little) harder up, the Batten fastned
on the Cap, and the Perpendicular Batten fastned
to the aforesaid Batten (as is described in §. 11. ¶ 21.
of this Volumne) will by their shaking cause a Spring,
which will throw the Frisket back again upon the
Tympan: Nay, though (as sometimes it happens)
a solid Wall serves to do the Office of a Stay for the
Frisket; yet with a little too hard throwing it up,
the Frisket it self will so shake and tremble (its Frame
being made of thin Iron) from end to end, that e’re
it recover rest, its own Motion will by the quick running
of a Spring through it beat it back again.
If the Stay stand too backward, then after he has
given the Frisket a Touch to bring it down, it will
be too long e’re it come down, and so hinder his
Riddance.
Therefore he places the Stay so, that the Frisket
may stand but a little beyond a Perpendicular backwards,
that with a near-guess’d strength in the tossing
it up it may just Stand, and not come back; For
then with a small Touch behind, it will again quickly
come down upon the Tympan.
11thly, He considers the Scituation of the Foot-step,
and that he places so as may best suit with his own
Stature; For a Tall man may allow the Foot-step to
stand farther off and lower than a Short, because his
Legs reach farther under the Carriage, and can tread
hard to add strength to his Pull; when a Short man
must strain his Legs to feel the Foot-step, and consequently
diminish the force of his Pull.
12thly, He fits the Gallows, so that the Tympan
may stand as much towards an upright as he can:
Because it is the sooner clapt down upon the Form
and lifted up again. But yet he will not place it so
upright, but that the White Sheets of Paper he lays
on it may lye securely from sliding downwards: And
for Reteration Sheets their lying upon the Points
secures them.
In these New-fashioned Presses there is no trouble
to place the Gallows, so as it may mount the Tympan
to any Position: For sliding the Male-duftails made
on the Feet of the Gallows through the Female Duftails
fastned on the Planck of the Carriage, performs this
great trouble that in our English Presses requires Un-nailing
the Studs of the Gallows and Nailing them again;
and many times tearing them and the Carriage-Planck
to pieces: And that so oft as the fancy of the
Press-man alters, or another Work-man comes to
Work at that Press.
13thly, Few Press-men will Set the range of the
Paper Bench to stand at right angles with the Plank
of the Carriage: But draws the farther end of the
Paper Bench so as the hither side may make an Angle
of about 75 Degrees (more or less) with the hither
side of the Carriage: The reason is, if the hither side of
the Paper Bench stand at right Angles with the hither
side of the Carriage, he must carry his Hand farther
when he Lays out Sheets which would hinder riddance:
Besides his Companion has a nearer access to
it, to look over the Heap; which he frequently does,
to see the constant Complexion of the Work.
14thly, The Press-man brings his Heap and Sets
it on the hither end of the Paper Bench as near the
Tympan as he can, yet not to touch it, lest it stop the
Tympan in a train of Work: and he places an end of
the Heap towards him. Then taking off the Paper-board
that cover’d it when it was Prest, he lays the
long sides of it parallel to the sides of the Paper
Bench: Then he takes the uppermost Sheet (which
as you may Remember is a Waste-sheet) and lays it
on the empty Paper-board; And taking Three or
Four or Five Quires off his Heap in both his Hands,
he lifts it a pretty height above his Head, and claps
it as hard as he can down upon the rest of the Heap,
to loosen the Sheets that with Pressing stick close
together: And not thinking them yet loose enough,
he thrusts them long-ways and side-ways, heaving
and huffing them till he think he has pretty well
loosen’d or hollow’d that quantity of Paper.
Then with the nail of his Right Hand Thumb,
sloaping from his Thumbward, he draws or slides
forwards the upper Sheet, and two or three more
commonly follows gradually with it, over the hither
edge the Heap, to prepare those Sheets ready for him
to snatch off the Heap.
15thly, He considers if the Face of the Tympan
be moist enough, for a Tympan-sheet to stick to, for
though he Wet the back-side of it before to supple it,
yet if the Tympan be strong, the Water will not soak
quite through to moisten the Face, So that he wets
the Spunge in fair Water, and besprinkles the upper
side or Face of the Tympan all over: And squeezing
the Water that is left in the Spunge well out again,
rubs it quickly and gently all over the Face of the
Tympan, to drink up or lick off the body of Water
that he besprinkles on, and only leaves moisture
on the Face of the Tympan to hold the Sheet.
Here accrews now a benefit by the make of these
New-fashioned Presses to the Master Printer: For
these Presses having a Gutter fastned to the Hind-rail
of the Carriage (as was described in § 10. ¶ 9. of
this Volumne) to receive the Water that falls from
the Tympan, and to convey it beyond the farther
side of the Press, secures the Blank of the Carriage
from Wet and moisture, and consequently from that
cause of Rotting.
Then he takes a Sheet of Paper off the Heap for a
Tympan-sheet, and Folds it exactly into four quarters,
and lays the Creases of the Sheet exactly upon
the middle of the Short and Long Crosses, if the Volumn
of the Form allows them both to be in their
respective middles of the Chase; if not, he lays the
Creases exactly against the Notches in the Chase that
are made for them respectively: And if his Frisket be
Blackt with former Work, he lays a Sheet of Waste-Paper
upon the Creast-sheet: Then lays the Tympan
down on the Form, and Pulls on these two Sheets,
and takes up his Tympan again, and lays by the
Waste-Sheet; but the Creast-Sheet he lays on the
Tympan. But first presses the Tympan downwards,
from under the Shank of each Point successively,
puts the two opposite sides of the Sheet under the
Shancks of the Points, and the Holes the Points prickt
with Pulling exactly under the bottom Revits of the
Points: Then taking a little Paste on the Ball of one
of his fingers, a little besmears the under corners of
that Sheet, and claps them down close on the Tympan,
that the Sheet may stick: But the bottom
corner of that side the Sheet that is next to him, he
besmears within the Matter of the Sheet, viz. within
the Impression the Form made. For when he has
fastned that corner down, he tears off the Margin,
(by guess) in a straight line athwart the very corner,
that it may not lye in his way to catch at as he Takes
off Sheets, when he is in his train of Work.
This Sheet is called the Tympan-sheet; and is only
as a standing mark to lay all the other Sheets exactly
even upon, while he Works upon White-paper.
The Press-man does now suppose he has Made
Ready: Yet for assurance he will try his Register
once more, lest some of the Quoins should have slipt.
How he made Register I shewed you before, wherefore
if his Register be not good, he mends it as I
there shewed. But we will suppose it now good,
wherefore he gently Knocks up all the Quoins in the
corners, with an equal force to fasten them.
Though I have in Numerical order set down these
Operations, Circumstances and Confederations in
this ¶: yet does not the Press-man oblige himself
to observe them in this or any other orderly succession:
Because it often happens that some of these Operations
may more readily be performed out of this
or any other prescribed Order.
Drawing the Tympans or Frisket is the Covering
and Pasting on of Vellom, Forrels or Parchment upon
the Frames. To each Tympan and Frisket is chose a
Skin large enough to cover and lap about the Frames.
These Skins the Press-man rumples up together,
and puts them into a Pail of fair Water to soak; and
if he thinks they do not soak fast enough, he takes
them and rubs them between his Hands, as Women
wash Cloaths, to supple them, that the Water may
Soak the faster in. And being throughly Soakt he
wrings the Water as well out as he can.
Then the Boy having provided a Brush and about
a Pint of Paste, made of fine Wheaten Flower, well
boiled in fair Water to the consistency of Hasty-pudding,
he spreads the Skin flat upon a Table; and
first Pastes the under Side of the Tympan; then lays it
on the middle of the Skin, and rearing each side
successively up, Pastes the Skin also from the insides
the Tympan to the outer edges of the Skin, and lays
the Tympan down flat again: Then he Pastes all the
other sides of the Tympan, and wraps the Skin about
the two long Sides first, Cutting the Sides of the
Skin away so much, till he leaves only enough to
reach almost quite through the under-sides of the
Tympan again: Then drawing and straining the
Skin tighter, he drives in the points of two-penny or
three-penny Nails about six Inches distant from one
another, to keep the Skin from starting as it Dries.
Having thus Drawn the sides, he with the Point
of a Pen-knife cuts square holes in the Skin, just
where the Iron-Joynts fall, for the Joynts to fall into,
and Draws and Strains the ends of the Tympan as he
did the Sides; wrapping the ends of the Skin under
the under-sides of the Tympan, and where Wood is,
drives in the points of Nails, as before.
Then setting it by to dry; when it is dry, he
draws the Nails.
As he Drew this Tympan, so he Draws the other:
and the Frisket also: only, because he cannot drive
in Nails, (the Frisket being all made of Iron) he
doubles the Skin over the sides of the Frisket, and
being well Pasted, as aforesaid; he Sews the sides
that Lap over down upon the whole Skin, to keep
it from starting while it drys: And he Pastes a Sheet
or two Thick of Paper all over the inside of it; as
well to strengthen as to thicken it.
Plate 29.
Paper is commonly Wet in a Tray full of fair
Water. The Press-man places the length of the Tray
before him; his dry Heap on the Left Hand the
Tray, and a Paper-Board with its Breadth before him
on his Right Hand of the Tray: He lays first a
Waste Sheet of Paper on the Paper-board, lest the
Board might Soyl or foul the first Sheet of the
Heap. Then he takes up the first Token, and lays it
in such a position that the backs of the Quires lye towards
his Right Hand, that he may the readier catch
at the Back of each Quire with his Right Hand, when
he is to Wet it: And he lays that Token athwart,
or somewhat Crossing the rest of the Heap, that he
may the easier know when he has Wet that Token.
Then taking the first Quire of the Heap with the
back of it in his Right Hand, and edge of the Quire
in his Left, he lays the Quire down upon the
Waste Sheet, so, as that the back of the Quire lye
upon the middle crease of the Waste Sheet, and consequently
one half of the Quire already laid even
down upon one half of the Waste Sheet. If the Paper
be Strong, he opens about half the Quire, and
turns it over dry upon the other half of the Waste
Sheet: But if the Paper be Weak and Spungy, he
opens the whole Quire, and lays that down Dry.
The reason why he lays the first Laying-down
Dry, is, because it lying under the rest of the Heap
will sufficiently imbibe the moisture that Soaks from
it: And the reason why he leaves but half a Quire
Dry for strong Paper, and an whole for Spungy, is,
Because Spungy Paper Soaks in moisture faster than
Strong.
Having laid down his Dry Laying, he takes another
Quire off the Dry Heap, with the back of the
Quire in his Right Hand, and the edge of the Quire
in his Left, (as before,) and closing his Hand a little,
that the Quire may bow a little downwards between
his Hands, he Dips the back of the Quire into his
Left Hand side of the Tray of Water: And discharging
his Left Hand of the Quire, Draws the
Quire through the Water with his Right; but as the
Quire comes out at the Right Hand side of the Tray,
he nimbly catches the edge of the Quire again in his
Left Hand, and brings it to the Heap, but by lifting
up his Left Hand bears the under side of the Quire
off the Dry Paper, laid down before, lest the Dry
Sheet should stick to the Wet, before he have plac’d
the Quire in an even position, and so perhaps wrinkles
a Sheet or two, or else put a Dry Sheet or two
out of their even position, on the sides or ends.
But this Drawing the Quire through the Water he
performs either nimbly or slowly: If the Paper be
Weak and Spungy, he performs it quickly; if Strong
and Stubborn, slowly.
To place this Quire in an even position, he lays
the back of the Quire exactly upon the opening
crease of the former Quire, and then lets the side
of the Quire in his Left Hand fall flat down upon the
Heap; and discharging his Right Hand, brings it to
the edge of the Quire; and with the assistance of his
Left Hand Thumb (still in its first position) opens or
divides either a third or half of the whole Quire,
according to the quality of the Paper, (as was said
before,) and spreading the Fingers of his Right Hand
as much as he can through the length of the Quire,
turns over his opened division of the Quire upon his
Right Hand side of the Heap.
The reason why he spreads the Fingers of his
Right Hand as much as he can through the Length
of the Quire; is, because the outside Half Sheet is Wet,
and consequently quickly Limber, so that if the
Paper be Weak, it would fall Down before the rest of
his Opening, and double into wrinkles, which thus
spreading his Fingers prevents.
In the same manner he Wets all the Quires of his
Dry Heap. See Plate 29.
But having Wet his first Token, he doubles down
a great corner of the upper Sheet of it on his Right
Hand, so as the farther corner may lye a little
towards the Left Hand of the crease in the middle
of the Heap, and so as the hither corner may Hang
out on the hither side of the Heap about an Inch and
an half: This Sheet is called the Token-Sheet, as being
a mark for the Press-man when he is at Work to
know how many Tokens of that Heap is Wrought-off,
and consequently to know how many is to Work.
When he has Wet the first Token, he removes the
next uppermost Dry Token askew on the Dry Heap,
and successively all the rest, as I shewed in the beginning
of this ¶.
Having Wet the whole Heap, he lays a Waste
Sheet of Paper upon it, that the Paper-Board to be
laid on, Soyl not the last Sheet of the Heap: Then
three or four times takes up as much Water as he
can in the hollow of his Hand, and throws and
sprinkles it all over the Waste-sheet that it may moisten
and Soak downwards into the un-wet upper
part of the last Division of the Quire.
The Paper being thus Wet, he takes up the whole
Heap upon the Paper-board, and sets it by in a convenient
place of the Room, and lays another Paper-board
upon it: And upon the middle of the Paper-board,
sets about Half an Hundred Weight, and lets
it stand by to press, commonly till next Morning:
For Press-men generally Wet their Paper after they
have left Work at Night.
The manner how Paper is Set out, shall be shewed
when I come to the Office of the Warehouse-keeper.
Ball Leathers (as I said before in § 11. ¶ 21.) are
either Pelts or Sheep-skins: If Pelts, they are chosen
such as have a strong Grain, and the Grease well
Wrought out of them: They are either Wet or Dry
before they come to the Press-mans use: If Wet, he
having before-hand provided a round Board, of
about Nine inches and an half Diameter: Supposing
the Ball-stocks to be six Inches diameter, lays the
Round Board upon the whole Pelt, and cuts by the
out-side of the Board so many round pieces as he can
out of the Pelt, reserving two for his present Use.
And hanging the rest up (commonly upon the
Braces of the Press) to dry, that they may not Stink
or Mould before he have occasion to use them.
But if his Pelts are Dry, he lays them to Soak (by
choice in Chamber-ly) but I never heard, or by my
experience could find why it is preferred before Fair
Water: For the purpose of Soaking them is only to
supple them.
If he Work with Leather, It is chosen with a
Strong and close grain: Wherefore by experience it
is found that the Neck-piece, and indeed all along the
back of the Skin is best; but it is commonly subject
to be greasie, which gives the Press-man sometimes
a great deal of trouble, to make his Balls Take. He
also lays the Ball Leathers in Soak to supple them.
When they (either Pelts or Leathers) are well
Soaked, he Rubs them well with both his Hands,
and then twists and wrings them (as Women do
Cloaths) to get the Water out again.
When they are well wrung, he Sits down upon a
Seat about fourteen or fifteen Inches high, commonly
a Heap of White Paper, if it stand conveniently
for him; but not upon a Printed Heap, least his
Weight pressing it cause the un-dryed Inck to Set-off:
He sits down, I say, and lays the Ball-stock upon his a
little opened Thighs near his Knees, that with closing
his Thighs he may hold it in a Steddy position, and
with the Handle of the Ball-stock towards his Belly.
Then taking the Ball-Leather, he laps or Folds about
three quarters of an Inch of one part of it over so
much of it towards his Left Hand into a Plaight, and
laying the edges of that Plaight towards him, an Inch
above the edge of the Ball-stock, he with the Head of
the Sheeps-foot drives a Ball-nail into the middle of
the Plaight, a little more than half an Inch above the
the edge of the Ball-stock: But he Drives the Ball-nail
not quite up to the Head, but leaves about almost a
quarter of an Inch of the Nail out; that with the
Claw of the Sheeps-foot he may Draw the Nail again
when occasion serves.
Having driven the first Nail, he turns about the
Ball-stock, till the opposite side, and as near as he can
guess, point of the edge of the Ball-stock lyes directly
upwards between his Thighs, (as before,) and then
taking as near as he can guess the opposite edge of
the Ball-leather between his Fore-fingers and Thumb
of his Left Hand, he holds the edge of the Ball-leather
upright, and having his Wooll or Hair Teized,
lying by him on his right Hand on the Floor, he
grasps at once as near as he can guess, so much as
may just serve to fill his Ball-leather and the hollow
of the Ball stock; which bringing to the hollow of
the Ball-stock, he draws the Ball-leather over it; and
lapping the edges of the Ball-leather over, as before,
makes another Plaight, and Drives another Nail, as before:
So that here is now the two opposite Sides of
the Leather Nailed on. Then he takes up the Ball
by the Handle in his Left Hand, and observes whether
the Wooll tend more to one than the other
open half: If it do, he thrusts it with the ends of his
Fingers of his Right Hand into the middle, or else
over to the other Half, till the Wooll lyes equally
on both the Halfs.
If he have put too much or too little Wooll into the
Ball, he either takes some out, or adds more to, as
the respective Half may require. Then lays it down
again between his Thighs, as before, and lays another
Plaight in the middle of the Ball-leather on one
of the open Halves, and as near as he can guess, between
the middle of the two opposite Nails; and
Nails that Plaight down to the Ball-stock, as before.
Plate 30
In the like manner he Nails down the other open
sides, (now Quarters,) and then again takes a View
how the Wooll is disposed into the middle of the
Ball; and where he finds it tend most to any of the
open Quarters, he Drives the Wooll with the ends
of his fingers, as before, or sometimes when the
Balls have been Wrought with, and blackt with
Inck, with the Head of the Sheeps-foot into the middle,
and then Nails down as before all the open
Quarters as near as he can guess; between the middle
of his former driven Nails, and then again, takes
another View as before, to see how the whole Ball
pleases him.
If he finds any of the Plaights laid too near one another,
he draws that Nail, and alters that Plaight, to
lay it as near as he can by guess, in the middle between
the next two Plaights.
Then he considers if his Ball be round: If it be
not, he thrusts the Wooll from the bunching-out
side, towards the wanting side, either with the ends
of his Fingers, or the Balls of one of his Hands;
while the Wooll is yet loose in the Ball-stock: For
when the Ball has been Wrought withal, it will grow
so hard, that the Wooll will not move out of its place.
Having Knockt up one Ball well, he Knocks up the
other, as the first.
The Balls are well Knockt up, when the Wooll is
equally dispersed about all the Sides, and the middle
smoothly covered with the Leather, viz. not
rising in Hillocks, or falling into Dales, not having
too much Wooll in them, for that will subject
them to soon hardning, and quickly be uneasie for the
Press-man to Work with; or too little, for that will
make the Leathers, as the Wooll settles with Working
soon flap, and wrap over it self into Wrinkles. So
that he cannot so well destribute his Balls: But the
Balls ought to be indifferently plump, to feel like an
Hard stuft Bed-pillow, or a strong Spunge a little
moistned with Water.
Having Knockt up the Balls, and Rub’d out the
Inck, as shall be shewed in the next ¶, he trys if his
Balls will Take, that is, he Dabs the top of one of
them three or four times lightly upon the hither part
of the Inck-block; If he finds the Inck sticks to it
equally all about, and that so much as has toucht
the Inck-block is Black, it Takes: But if scarce any of
the Leather is Black, or that it be Black and
White in Splotches, then the Balls does not Take:
Wherefore he considers whether his Ball be too Wet,
or else Greasie, for each of these inconveniences
will hinder the Taking of the Ball.
If it be too Wet, he burns half a Sheet or an
whole Sheet of Waste Paper, and waves his Ball to
and fro over the flame of it; but so quick and cautiously
that he neither shrinks the Leather or Dryes it
too much: In Winter time when a fire is at Hand,
he dryes it gently by the fire.
If it be Greasie, he with the edge of the Ball-knife
scrapes off the thick Oyl, that Works down out
of the Nut and Spindle of the Press, or else with the
point of his Knife takes a convenient quaintity of
Oyl out of the Plattin-pan, or for want of either
takes fresh Sallad Oyl and smears and spreads it well
all over the whole Ball-leather; and then holding the
Ball-knife in his Right Hand, with its edge a little
sloping downwards that it cut not the Ball-leather,
and the handle of the Ball-Stock in his Left Hand,
he joyns the bottom of the Ball-leather, viz. as
near the outer edge of the Leather as he can, for the
Ball Nails to the edge of the Ball-knife, and turning
the Ball about by its Handle, presses it hard against
the sloapt edge of the Ball-knife, and at once drives
the laid on Oyl and Grease too before the sloapt edge
of the Ball-knife; but he keeps the Handle of the Ball-Stock,
and consequently the whole Ball too, constantly
turning, that the whole circumference of the
Ball may be Scraped: And as the Ball has performed
a Revolution against the sloapt edge of the Ball-knife,
he draws gradually his Left Hand a little backish, that
the sloapt edge of the Ball-knife may by several
Spiral revolutions of the Ball, scrape up to the very
top of the Ball, and carries before it the Oyl and
Grease thither: Which having there, he gathers up
upon the Blade of his Ball-knife and disposes of it, as
of so much Dirt and Filth.
After a due process of either of these Operations
respectively, his Ball will Take, and he again dabs
gently the top of his Ball three or four times on the
Inck-block (as before) and finding it Take, he takes the
Handle of it into the clutched Fingers of his Left
Hand, holding the Ball-stock just a little above the
circle of his Fore-finger and Thumb, and grasps
the Handle of the other Ball-stock into his Right
Hand, with the circle of his Finger and Thumb
upwards, and the now bottom of his Right Hand
downwards, but not resting upon the Ball-stock;
and trys if that Ball will Take, by dabbing the Leather
of it three or four times upon the other Ball;
If it do not Take with dabbing, he twists the Balls
in either Hand close and hard, contrary to one another,
to besmear the upper with the under Ball.
If after this, the upper Ball do not Take, he considers
the cause, and remedies it, as he did the
first Ball.
Before the Press-man goes to Work, he Rubs out
his Inck.
If the Inck have lain long on the Inck-block since
it was Rubbed out, the Superficies of it generally is
dryed and hardened into a Film or Skin, wherefore
the Press-man carefully takes this Film quite off with
the Slice before he disturb the Body of the Inck:
For should any, though never so little of it, mingle
into the Inck, when the Ball happens to take up
that little particle of Filin, and delivers it again upon
the Face of the Letter, it will be a Pick, and
Print black, and deface the Work: And if it get
between the Face of two or more Letters, or the
Hollows of them, it will obliterate all it covers.
And if it be Pull’d upon, and the Press-man not
careful to over-look his Work, it may run through
the whole Heap.
Wherefore having carefully skinned off the Film
with the edge of the Slice, he scrapes his Slice clean
with the Ball-knife, lest some small parts of the Film
should yet stick to, or remain on the Slice: And
then with the Slice brings the body of Inck into the
middle of the Plain of the Inck-block, and searches
the sides of the Inck-block, by thrusting the edge of
the Slice forwards along them and all the angles of
the Inck-block, and so scrapes off all the Inck as clean as
he can, and gathers it to the whole mass of Inck:
Then with the Slice he turns the whole mass about
half a score times over and over to mingle it well
together, lest some part of it should be more consolidated
than the rest: And to mingle it yet better,
he then falls to Rubbing it with the Brayer, grasping
the Handle of it in his Right Hand, he begins to Rub
with all his strength at the hithermost side-boundings
of the Body of Inck, and keeping Rubbing
through the almost whole length of the Inck-block,
he gradually proceeds to the farther side of the Body
of Inck. In this manner of Rubbing he bears
hardest upon the farther edge of the Brayer, because
the hither sides of the Inck-block are not fenced in
with Rails about them; and should he Rub with the
bottom of the Brayer flat upon the Inck-block, he
might draw too great a body of Inck to the unfenced
sides; so that the Inck would be subject to run off:
This Rubbing is only to spread the Inck pretty equally
over the superfices of the Inck-block: Wherefore he
now begins a circular Rubbing, observing in the circulation
of the Brayer that he always a little mounts
the part of the edge of the bottom, which in its progress
is ready to approach a prominent body of Inck,
that it may somewhat slide over it, that the Inck be
not lickt up high on the sides of the Brayer.
Then with the Handle of the Slice in his Left Hand
and the Handle of the Brayer in his Right, he joyns
the bottom edge of the Slice to the side of the Brayer,
holding the flat of the Slice Horizontal, and the bottom
of the Brayer perpendicular both over the Inck-block,
and keeping his Brayer and Slice in this position,
by turning the Handle of the Brayer in his Right Hand,
held pretty stiff against the edge of the Slice, he
scrapes off all the Inck that the side of the Brayer
has lickt up: And setting down his Brayer, he takes
the Slice in his Right Hand and lays what Inck he
scrapes off the side of the Brayer again upon the Inck-Block,
and Slices the whole mass of Inck into the farthermost
corner of the Inck-block.
This Rubbing of the Inck may serve when the
Inck-block had Inck on it before.
But if no Inck were on the Inck-block before, then
he lays new Inck on the Inck-block: Wherefore he considers
what Work he Works on: whether it be small
or great Letter: If it be small Letter, or curious
Work, the Inck must be Strong he Works with: But
if it be great Letter or sleight Work, he makes Soft
Inck serve, or at least mingles but a little Hard Inck
with it.
If the Inck be too Hard, as sometimes in very frosty
Weather it will be, then, though his Work be curious,
yet he must Rub in a little Soft Inck to soften it;
because it will not else Destribute well upon the Balls;
especially if the Leathers be a little too Wet, or a little
Greasie: Besides, it may and many times does pull
and tear the Grain off the Skin; which not only
spoils the Skin, but fills the Form full of Picks.
Sometimes when he finds the Inck too pale, he
Rubs in Blacking, but he first joults the bottom of the
Blacking Tub three or four times against the ground,
that if by chance any dirt or filth have gotten into
it, it may sink to the bottom of the Tub.
But when he either mingles Strong and Weak Inck
together, or else puts in Blacking, he applies himself
again first to Rubbing with the Brayer, the length-way
of the Inck-block, as before, and then to a circular Rubbing,
as before; and to cleansing his Brayer, as before; and
this long-ways Rubbing, circular Rubbing, and cleansing
his Brayer, he reiterates so oft, till he judge the
whole mass of Inck sufficiently Rubbed and mingled,
and the Blacking perfectly imbibed by the Inck: And
then he Slices the whole mass of Inck to the farthermost
corner of the Inck-block, as before.
I shewed you in ¶ 10 of this § how he dabb’d the
Ball on the Inck-block, to try if it would Take: And
I shewed you in what Posture he handled the Balls
when he tryed if the other Ball would Take: Therefore
for Taking Inck and Handling the Balls I (to
avoid tautology) refer you to that ¶.
Having now Taken Inck, and gotten the Balls in
his Hands, in that posture, he Works them side-ways
upon one another to and from him, and with a craft
(acquired by use) in the Handling of the Balls, all
the while keeps the Handles, and consequently the
whole Ball-stocks (both) turning round in his Hands
and in a motion contrary to each other, viz. His
under Ball moving from the Left Hand to the Right,
and his upper Ball moving from his Right Hand to
to the Left; and by and by in a second motion contrary
to the first, viz. his under Ball moving from
the Right Hand to the Left, and his upper Ball
moving from the Left Hand to the Right.
And these motions and Operations he continues
so long till he judges, and in part perceives the Inck
is equally Destributed all over the whole Ball-Leathers.
The first way of turning the Ball Handles, while
the Balls are moved to and from him, is made by
pressing the ends or Balls of the fingers of both his
Hands upon the Ball-handles from-wards his Hands:
And the second way of turning them contrary to the
first, is made by gathering in the ends or Balls of
of his fingers while they are in their circular to and
fro motion. But because in gathering in his fingers,
he does somewhat dis-ingage his grasp of the Ball-Handles,
therefore he lightly and almost insensibly,
tosses the Ball-stocks a little up, that when they are
dis-ingaged from a close grasp, his fingers ends may
the easier draw the Handles towards him. This is
a Hand-craft, which by continued use and practice,
becomes familiar to his Hands.
The Press-man imagines, or by his eye judges the
length of his Form (be it what Volumne it will) devided
into four equal parts or Rows, which four Rows
for distinction sake, I shall number from the Left
Hand to the right, with first Row, second Row,
third Row, fourth Row, just as an Octavo Form is
exactly devided by four Rows of Pages.
He places his Left Hand Ball at the hither end of
the first Row, so that though the Ball be round, yet
the square encompassed within that round shall sufficiently
cover so much of the square of the hither end
of that Row as it is well capable to cover; and his
Right Hand Ball he sets upon the hither end of the
third Row: He sets his Balls close upon the Face of
the Letter, with the Handles of the Ball-stocks a little
bending towards him: But as he presses them upon
the Face of the Letter, he mounts them perpendicular;
and lifting at once both the Balls lightly just
clear off the Face of the Letter, he removes them
about the fifth part of the breadth of the Form upwards,
viz. towards the farther side of the Form,
and again sets them close down upon the Face of the
Letter, with the Handles of the Ball-stocks again bending
a little towards him, as before: and as he presses
them upon the Face of the Letter, mounts them perpendicular,
as before: Thus in about four or five
or six such motions, or rather removes of the Balls,
according to the breadth of the Form, he Beats over
the first and third Rows. Thus Beating from the hither
towards the farther side, is in Press-mens phrase
called Going up the Form.
The reason why he bends the Handles of the Ball-stocks
a little towards him, is, that the Ball-leathers
drag not upon the Face of the Letter; for then the
edges of the hollows between the Lines or Words, or
the edges of the cavities below the Face would scrape
Inck off the Balls to stop up or choak the Form. And
the reason why (before he removes them) he mounts
the Handles of the Ball-stocks a little perpendicular,
is, that the Balls may touch in their greatest capacity
upon the Face of the Letter.
To Come down the Form, he skips his Balls both
at once from the first and third Row to the second
and fourth Row, and brings them down as he carried
them up; only, as before, he bended the Handles
of the Ball-stocks a little towards him, so now he
bends them a little from him: That the Ball-leathers
(now Coming down) drag not, as aforesaid. Then in
like manner he again skips the Balls from the second
and fourth Row to the first and third Row, and
again Goes up the Form with the Balls, as he did before.
And then again skips, as before, and Comes
down the Form again with the Balls.
Having thus gone twice upwards and twice downwards
with the Balls, the Form is sufficiently Beaten
in a train of Work, when the Face of the Letter Takes
well.
But if he Beats the first Sheet of a fresh Form, or
after a Form is Washed, or he makes a Proof, he Goes
three four or five times Upwards and Downwards:
Least the Face of the Letter should happen to be Wet
or moist, and consequently un-apt to take Inck,
without reiterated Beatings.
We will suppose now two Press-men going in the
Morning to their train of Work: The one they
distinguish by the name of First, the other his Second,
these call one another Companions: The First is he
that has wrought longest at that Press, except an
Apprentice, for he must allow any Journey-man
though new-come that stile: Generally the Master
Printer reposes the greatest trust upon his care and
curiosity for good Work; although both are equally
liable to perform it.
All the priviledge that the First has above the Second
is, that the First takes his choice to Pull or Beat the
agreed stint first: And that the Second Knocks up
the Balls, Washes the Forms, Teizes Wooll, and does
the other more servile Work, while the First is imploid
about making Register, ordering the Tympan,
Frisket, and Points, &c. or otherwise Making Ready
the Form, &c.
The First now takes his spell at Pulling: For the First
and Second take their spell of Pulling and Beating an
agreed number of Tokens: Sometimes they agree to
change every three Tokens, which is three Hours
work, and sometimes every six Tokens; that they
may both Pull and Beat a like number of Tokens
in one day.
Under the general notion of Pulling and Beating is
comprised all the operations that is in a train of work
performed by the Puller and the Beater: For though
the Puller Lays on Sheets, Lays down the Frisket, Lays
down the Tympans and Frisket, Runs in the Carriage,
Runs out the Carriage, takes up the Tympans, Takes
up the Frisket, Picks the Form, Takes off the Sheet,
and Lays it on the Heap, yet all these Operations are
in the general mingled and lost in the name of Pulling.
And as in Pulling, so in Beating; for though the
Beater Rubs out his Inck, Slices it up, Destribute the
Balls, peruses the Heap, &c. yet all these Operations
are lost in the general name of Beating. Thus
they say the First or the Second is Pulling; or, the First
or the Second is Beating; though they are performing
the different Operations aforesaid: unless upon particular
occasions the respective Operations are particularly
nam’d.
As there are many Operations conjunct to Pulling,
and Beating, so the Press-man performs them with
various Set and Formal Postures and Gestures of the
Body. For,
To take a Sheet off the Heap, He places his Body
almost straight before the hither side of the Tympan:
I say almost straight, Because it is more straight before
the side of the Tympan than it is before the angle
made by the Paper-bench and the side of the Tympan:
But he nimbly twists the upper part of his Body a
little backwards towards the Heap, the better to see he
takes but one Sheet off, which he loosens from the rest
of the Heap (as I have shewed before) by drawing the
back-side of the Nail of his right Thumb on his Right
Hand nimbly over almost the whole length of the
Heap, and receiving the hither end of the Sheet
with the inside of his Left Hand fingers and Thumb
catches with his Right Hand about two inches within
the farther edge of the Sheet near the upper corner,
and about the length of his Thumb below the hither
edge of the Sheet, and brings it nimbly to the
Tympan: And at the same time twists his Body again
straight before the Tympan, only a very little moving
his right Foot from its first Station a little forwards
under the Carriage Plank: And as the Sheet is coming
to the Tympan (we suppose now he Works upon
White Paper) he nimbly disposes the fingers of
his Right Hand under the farther edge of the Sheet
near the upper corner; and having the Sheet thus in
both his Hands, lays the farther side and two extream
corners of the Sheet down even upon the
farther side and extream farther corners of the Tympan-sheet,
but he is careful the upper corner of the
Sheet be first laid even, upon the upper corner of
the Tympan-sheet; that he may the sooner disingage
his Right Hand: And if by the nimble casting his
eye, he perceive the sides of the Sheet lye un-even
upon the Tympan-sheet, he with his Left Hand at
the bottom corner of the Sheet, either draws it backwards,
or pulls it forwards, as the Sheet may lye higher
or lower on the hither corners of the Tympan-sheet,
while his Right Hand being disingaged, as aforesaid,
is removed to the backside the Ear of the Frisket,
and with it gives it a light touch to double it down
upon the Tympan. And by this time his Left Hand
is also disingaged, and slipt to the hither under corner
of the Frisket, to receive it, that it fall neither too
hard or too quick down upon the Tympan: For hard
falling may shake the loose Sheet on the Tympan out
of its place; and so may the quick pressure of the Air
between the Tympan and Frisket, after the Sheet is
well laid: and while his Left Hand receives the Frisket
his right is disingaged from the Ear of the Frisket,
and removed to the middle of the back-side
the Tympan; which he grasps between the Balls of
his Fingers and Thumb, to lift it off the Gallows,
and double it and the Frisket together on the
Form. And while the Tympan is coming, he slips
his Left Hand Fingers from under the Frisket to the
hither outer corner of it, as well to keep the Sheet
close to the Tympan in its position, as to avoid the
jobbing of the lower side of the Frisket against any
small square shoulder, either of the Furniture, Quoins,
Chase, or the corners that may stand higher than
their common Plain.
Then nimbly slipping his Left Hand, he with it
grasps the Rounce, and with a moderate strength,
nimbly gives its Winch about one Turn round; I say
about, because the first Pull will generally fall out to be
made about the middle of the Carriage; (as was shewed
in § 11. ¶ 16.) but perhaps not just in the
middle: yet to regulate his Runing in, he made a mark
before on the farther Rail of the Tympan, (as I shewed
in ¶ 3. of this §) to which mark he Runs the Carriage
in, till he bring the mark in a Range with the
fore-edge of the Plattin; and as it is coming, skips
his Hand to within an Inch or two of the end of the
Bar, and then at once gently leans his Body back,
that his Arm as he Pulls the Bar towards him may
keep a straight posture; because in a Pull it has then
the greatest strength. And he also slips his right Foot
upon the Foot-step, while his Left Hand holds fast by
the Rounce; as well to rest on the Foot-step and Rounce,
as to enable his Body to make a stronger Pull;
which will prove Longer or Shorter, according to
the strength put to it, and also the Hard or Soft Justifying
of the Head, (as was shewed in ¶ 5. of this §.)
Then disingaging his Right Hand again from the
Handle of the Bar, he slips it to the Bow of the Bar,
before the Handle fly quite back to the Cheek of the
Press: For should the Bar by its forcible Spring
knock hard against the Cheek of the Press, it might
not only shake some of its Parts or circumstantial
appurtenances out of order, but subject the whole
Machine with oft reiteration to an unstable position.
Besides, the farther the Bar flyes back, the more he
hinders quick riddance in recovering it again. But
yet he must let the Bar fly so far back as that the
Tympan may just rise clear off the Plattin; lest when
he Runs in his Second Pull, the Face of the Plattin rub
upon the Tympan, and shoves the Sheet upon the
Face of the Letter, and sometimes Slurs, and sometimes
Doubles it upon the Face of the Letter.
Having Pull’d the First Pull, and having the
Rounce still in his Left Hand, He turns the Rounce about
again, till the Carriage Runs in so far, as that the
second mark on the Rail of the Tympan comes into
a Range with the hither edge of the Plattin, as before
the first mark did; and then Pulls his second Pull,
as he did his first; and slips his Right Hand again
off the Handle of the Bar to the Bow, (as before) and
guides the Bar up to its Catch leisurely, that coming
now near the Cheek it knock not against it: and just as
he has Pulled his Second Pull, he gives a pretty quick
and strong pressure upon the Rounce, to turn it back,
and the Carriage out again: And so soon as he has
given that one pressure, (as aforesaid) he desingages
his Left Hand from the Rounce, and claps the fingers
of it under the middle of the Tympan, and on the Ear
of the Frisket: and while this is doing, removes his
Right Hand to the now upper, but immediately it
will be the under-side of the Tympan Rail, within
four or five Inches of the upper end of it, to receive
the Tympan, as it is lifted up off the Form by his Left
Hand. And having thus received it, lets it descend
gently down on the Gallows. And as it is descending,
slips his Left Hand fingers under the hither lower
corner of the Frisket, and gives the Frisket a toss
up; while by this time his Right Hand being disingaged
from the Tympan, is ready to catch the Frisket
by the Ear, and convey it quick and gently to its
Stay: And while the Frisket is going up; he slips the
end of the middle finger of his Left Hand, or sometimes
the ends of his two middle fingers with their
Balls upwards, under the hither lower corner of the
Pulled off Sheet, and at the instant he has got them
under, he nimbly bows his Joynts upwards, to throw
up the corner of the Sheet, to make it mount a little,
for him to gather about two Inches hold of it
between the Balls of his Thumb and fore-finger. And
heaving the whole Sheet by this corner a little upwards,
He at the same time lifts it off the Points, and
draws it somewhat towards him; and as it comes,
catches it near the upper corner of the same side of the
Sheet, between the foremost Joynts of his fore-fingers
and Ball of the Thumb of his Right Hand, and nimbly
twisting about his Body towards the Paper-bench
carries the Sheet over the Heap of White-paper to a
Paper-board, which before he placed beyond that
Heap on his Right Hand, (as aforesaid in ¶ 14.) and
lays it down upon a Waste-sheet laid for that purpose
on that Paper-board; but while it is coming over the
White-paper Heap, though he have the Sheet between
both his fore-fingers and Thumbs, yet he holds
the Sheet so loosly that it may move between them
as on two Centers, as his Body twists about (as aforesaid)
from the side of the Tympan towards the side of
the Paper-bench.
Thus you see both the Press-mans Hands at the
same time alternatively ingaged in different Operations:
For while his Right Hand is imployed in one
Action his left is busie about another, and these exercises
so suddenly varied, that they seem to slide into
one another; one Posture beginning when the
former is but half performed.
Having thus Pulled one Sheet, and laid it down:
He turns his Body towards the Tympan again, and as
he is turning gives the next Sheet on the White-paper
Heap a Touch with the backside of the Nail of his
Right Thumb, as before, to draw it a little over the
hither edge of the Heap, and lays it on the Tympan,
&c. as he did the first; and so successively every
Sheet till the whole Heap of White-paper be
Wrought off.
As he comes to a Token-sheet, he un-doubles that,
and smooths out the Crease with the back-side of
the Nails of his Right Hand, that the Face of the
Letter may Print upon smooth Paper. And being
Printed off, he folds it again, as before, for a Token-sheet
when he works the Reiteration.
Having Wrought off the White-paper, he turns the
Heap thus:
He takes the Paper-board that his White-paper lay
on, and sets it down on the ground: Then removes
the Heap to his Left Hand; then takes up the Paper-board,
and lays it on his Right Hand: And if it be
Twelves, or any Form Imposed like Twelves, as Twenty
fours, &c. he turns it from one long side of the
Paper to the other, that is, the long side of the
Paper that stands on his Right Hand when the Printed
side lies upwards, he turns over to his Left Hand,
and lays the un-printed side upwards. In performing
this, he grasps off of the Wrought off Heap so
much at once between both his Hands as he can well
govern, without disordering the eveness of the sides of
the Heap, viz. a Token, or more, and lays that upon
the Paper-board; then takes another grasp in
like manner, and lays that on the first grasp, and so
successively, till he have turned the whole Heap, grasp
by grasp. Then removes the Heap near the Tympan,
and lays the other Paper-board beyond it, as the first
Paper-board stood before; always remembring to
lay a Waste-sheet first on the Paper-board.
Having now turned the Heap, and made Register
on the Reteration Form (as was shewed in ¶ 7. of
this §) he Works off the Reteration: But he somewhat
varies his posture in the Laying on his Sheets:
For as before, when he wrought White Paper, he
catcht the Sheet by the upper farther corner with his
Right Hand, he now having heaved up the Sheet
(as aforesaid) catches it as near the farther side of the
farther Point-hole as he can, with the Ball of his
Right Hand Thumb above the Sheet, and the Ball
of his fore-finger under the Sheet, the readier to lay
the Point-hole over its respective Point: which having
done, he slips his Body a little backwards, and both
his Hands with it, his Right Hand towards the hither
Point-hole, with the back-sides of the Nails of his
fingers to draw or stroak it over the Point: and the
fingers of his Left Hand, as they come from the farther
corner, nimbly slipping along the bottom edge
of the Sheet, till they come to the hither corner; and
then with his fore-finger and Thumb, layes hold of
it, to help guide the Point-hole on that Point also:
Then Pulls that Sheet, as before, as he did the
White Paper, and so successively all the rest of the
Reteration. Only, the Token-sheets, as he meets with
them, he Folds not down again, as he did the White
Paper.
If a Press-man have no Companion, but works alone;
he has a little oblong Square Form or Bench
made to stand so high as the Face of the Letter upon
the Press-stone, and so long as to contain the Balls
when set upon the Ball-leathers.
This Form or Bench some Work-men will place
on the hither side the hither Cheek, within about half
an Inch of the foreside of the Cheek: And other
Work-men will place it on the farther side of the Carriage;
each sort of Work-men supposing that in the
place he sets it, the Balls stand most commodious for
his quick taking up and setting down: I shall not
plead the convenience of either, but in short speak
to the inconveniences of both.
The inconvenience of placing it on the hither side
the hither Cheek, is, that the Press-man must twist
his Body somewhat about to take up the Balls. And
the inconvenience of placing it on the further side the
Carriage, is, that the Press-man must thrust his Body
over the Form to take up the Balls: both ways strain
the Body, and hinder riddance.
Those that place it on the hither side the Cheek,
begin and end their Beating as has already been shewed,
viz. on the hither side the Form: But those
that place it on the farther side the Carriage, begin
and end their Beating on the Rows on the farther side
the Form.
One Press-man in his train of Work will Beat so
soon as he has laid the Tympan on the Gallows after
Pulling: Another will not Beat till he has laid his
Sheet on the Tympan, and doubled the Frisket down
on it: both sorts fancying their own way most quick
and commodious: For these conveniences are the
purposes they both drive at.
When Red and Black are to be Printed upon the
same Sheet, the Press-man first Makes Register, as
was shewed ¶ 7. and Makes Ready his Form as was
shewed ¶ 14. of this §. Then having a new Frisket
Drawn, as was shewed ¶ 8. He Prints upon his new
Frisket with Black. And having before a Proof-sheet
Printed Black, with the Words to be Printed Red
under-lined on that Proof-sheet; He takes off his
Frisket, and lays it flat on a Paper-board, and with a
sharp-pointed Pen-knife neatly cuts out those words
on the Frisket, and about half a Scaboard Margin
round about the words, that he finds under-lined on
the Proof-sheet: Then sets the Frisket by till he has
wrought off his Heap with Black, and puts his common
Frisket on the Joynts of the Tympan again.
While the Press-man is Cutting the Frisket, the Compositer
takes those Words out of the Form that are
Under-lin’d on the Proof-sheet, and in their place puts
Quadrats, m-Quadrats, Spaces, &c. to Justifie the
Lines up again.
Then Locking up the Form, the Press-man Works
off the Heap Black, as was shewed in the last ¶.
Having wrought off his Heap Black, he takes off
the common Frisket, and puts on his new cut Frisket:
Then taking a piece of thick Scaboard he cuts it
into so many small slips as there are Whites in the
Form to be Printed with Red; These small slips he
cuts exactly to the length of the Quadrats, &c. the
Compositer put in, and to the breadth of the Body; but
rather a small matter less than bigger, lest they bind
at the bottom of the Shank of the Letter: for when
the Compositer takes out the Quadrats, &c. he put in
before the Form was Wrought off Black, these slips
of Scaboards the Press-man pricks on the Point of a
Bodkin and puts them into their respective holes: And
being loosen’d off the Point of the Bodkin with the
blunt Point of another Bodkin, are laid down flat on
the Press-stone; These slips are called Underlays, and
are described in ¶ 14. of this §. Upon these Underlays
the Compositer puts in again the Words or Letters
he took out before the Form was Wrought off
Black: So that these Words now stand higher than
the other Matter of the Form, and therefore will
Print when the other Matter will not. But yet for
the more assurance that the other Matter Print not,
the New-cut Frisket was prepar’d, which hinders any
thing to Print but what Prints through the Holes
cut in it; which Holes these Underlaid Words fall
exactly through.
Having mingled the Red, or any other intended
Colour with Varnish, as shall be shew’d in the next
¶, he Beats the Form as with Black; and Pulls it
very lightly, lest these Underlaid Words standing
higher than the rest of the Matter, Print too Hard.
Varnish is the common Menstruum for all Colours
that are to be used in Printing.
Red is the chief Colour that is used with Black in
Book-Printing: of Reds there are two sorts in general
use, viz.Vermillion and Red-Lead; Vermillion
is the deepest and purest Red, and always used
to Books of Price. Red-Lead is much more faint
and foul, and though more used than Vermillion,
yet used only to Books of Vulgar Sale and Low
price, as Almanacks, &c.
Yet may other Colours also be used to Print withal;
yea, any Colours that are used in Oyl-Painting,
as Lake and Russet, which are Reds deeper than
Vermillion; Virditur Indico and Bice for Blews;
Orpment, Pinck, Yellow Oaker, for Yellow: Virdigreace,
and Green Virditur, for Greens: or what
other Colours may be fancied.
But all Colours for Printing must be Ground with
Soft Varnish; especially those Colours that are of
themselves Dryers; as Red-Lead, Vermillion, Orpment,
Verdigrease; For should they be Ground
with Hard Varnish the Colour’d Inck would dry and
harden so quick and fast upon the Form, that it
would soon be choaked up, and consequently want
Washing e’re the Form be Wrought off; which would
be very troublesome to the Press-man, because he
must expect to have all his Underlays to new fit to
their places: And besides, it will so Dry and Harden
upon the Balls, that the Grain of the Leathers
would quickly tear off, and fill the Form full of
Picks.
The fittest Colours therefore for Printing, are
such as are of the lightest Body and Brightest
Colour.
They are to be Ground with a Mullar on a smooth
Marble Stone, so long that the Colour becomes
impalpable, and is throughly mingled with the
Varnish.
This Operation is seldom used but for Printing
Names; and therefore rarely drest in a Form to the
Press; but is usually Printed in the Stick: And then
the Compositer Justifies his Stick very Hard, as well
that the Letters fall not out when the Back of the
Stick is turned upwards, as that the strength of the
Hard Varnish the Face of the Letter is Beat with,
pulls not the Letter out of the Stick.
Therefore the Press-man makes two little Balls,
by tying about an Handful of Wooll in new clean
Leather, and dabs one of his Balls upon the Hardest
Varnish he has, and with the other destributes his Varnish
to a convenient Fatness, as he did his Balls in ¶ 12.
With one of these Balls he Beats the Name; and having
his Paper Wet, he lays a single Blanket on the Correcting-stone,
and his Paper on the Blanket; and
with a Riglet fitted to the Stick, he presses the Letter
to keep it straight in Line: Then places the Face
of the Letter exactly flat down upon the Paper, and
with the force of both his Hands presses the Letter
hard and even down upon the Paper, to receive an
Impression: But he takes care not to wriggle the
Letter in the Stick backwards or forwards, lest
either the Beard Print, or the sides of the Letter be
more or less besmeared with the Varnish: Because
the Gold or Silver will stick to the least Sully that
the Varnish may chance to make.
Then cutting his Gold or Silver to a size full big
enough to cover the Printed Name or Matter, he
lays his Gold or Silver on what was Printed, and
with a little White Cotton gently presses the Gold
or Silver upon the Printed Matter, and lets the Paper
lye by a while; as well that it may dry, as the
Varnish Harden, (which will quickly be) he with
his Handkerchief gently wipes over the Printed
Matter. So shall all the Gold or Silver that was
toucht by the Varnish, stick to the Varnish on the
Paper, and the other will wipe away.
If he lifts to Polish it, he uses a Tooth or the Ivory
Handle of a Knife.
1. The Press-man is to make a Proof so oft as occasion
requires: If he takes off his Form to make a
Proof, he Un-locks and lays the Quoins, as shall be
shewed when I come to Washing of the Form: but many
Printing-houses have an empty Press stands by to
make Proves on.
The Compositer having brought the Form to the
Press, lays it down on the Press-stone, and the Press-man
places it even under the Plattin, that the Plattin
Bear not harder on the hither or farther side of
the Form: Then he Pulls the Cards upon the Form,
to press it into a flat position: Then Beats the Form
four or five times over, that he may be sure it Take:
Then he lays the Proof-sheet on the Form, so as by
his Judgement it shall have an equal Margin on all
its opposite sides, and a double Blanket on the Proof-sheet;
and Running in the Carriage, Pulls the Proof-sheet:
Having Pull’d it, he Runs-out the Carriage
again, and takes the Proof-sheet off the Form. Then
with the Ly-brush dipt in Ly, he Rubs over the Face
of the Letter three or four times, to Wash off what
Inck may remain on it, and carries the Form
again to the Correcting-stone and lays it down: And
the Proof he carries to the Compositers Case.
2. If the Form he Works on be Small-letter, or Old
Letter, he uses Strong Inck; and Beats Lean: For
Weak Inck and Fat Beating, will quickly Choak up
the Face of the Letter. But to fetch off Hard Inck
thin Beat on the Face of the Letter, he Pulls Hard.
But if the Form be great Letter or Black English Letter,
it will allow Fatter Beating.
3. He keeps a constant and methodical posture and
gesture in every action of Pulling and Beating, which
in a train of Work becomes habitual to him, and
eases his Body, by not running into unnecessary
divertions of Postures or Gestures in his Labour, and
it eases his mind from much of its care, for the same
causes have constantly the same effects. And a Pull
of the same strength upon the same Form, with the
same Beating, and with the same Blankets, &c. will
give the same Colour and Impression.
4. That every two Sheets, if the Form be small
Letter (rarely three, unless Great Letter) he Takes Inck;
and so soon as he comes off the Form, viz. has Beat
it, he falls to Destributing his Balls. And that Sheet
which he Takes not Inck he steps to the Heap to overlook
the Colour, viz. whether he has Taken too much
or too little Inck; and to see if no accidents have
befallen the Form, viz. that no Letters, Quadrats or
Furniture, &c. Rise, that no Letters are Batter’d;
That Bearers fail not, viz. grow so thin with long
Pulling on, as not to perform the office of Bearers;
that the Register keep good; that no Pick be got
into the Form, or any other accident that may deface
the beauty of the Work, but all this while still
keeps his Balls Destributing.
If he have taken too much Inck, which sometimes
may happen (but seldom for want of carelessness)
he will not Take Inck again, till he have
wrought his Balls to a good and moderate Colour.
But if the Sheet already Pull’d, be so Black that it
may not tolerably pass, he Doubles or Folds it in the
middle and lays it cross the Heap, that the Gatherer
may take or leave it, in case the Heap falls Short.
If he foresee the next Sheet will also be too Black, he
takes a Dry Sheet of Waste Paper between his Balls
and Destributes upon that Dry Sheet, that it may
take off the Inck.
If in doing this, the strength of the Inck have
Pull’d the Paper to pieces, so that small rowl’d-up
bits may stick upon the Ball-leathers, if they be but
a few he picks them off with his Fore-finger and
Thumb, but if there be many he makes his Balls
clean by Scraping them (as I shewed in ¶ 10. of this
§) for else these small rowl’d-up bits of Paper will be
apt to fill the Form full of Picks.
If Letters, Quadrats or Furniture Rise, he puts
them down, the Letters and Quadrats with his Bodkin,
and the Furniture with his Hammer, and Locks
the Quarter they are in, a little Harder.
If any Letters are Batter’d, he Unlocks the Quarter
they are in, and desires the Compositer to put in others
in their room.
If Bearers Fail, that is, Squeeze thinner with long
Pulling on, he takes those Bearers off, if they are on
the Frisket, and puts on thicker: But if the Furniture,
were Under-laid (as I shewed in ¶ 7. of this
§) he Unlocks the Quarter they are in, and Underlays
them according to his Judgement.
If Register be Out, which sometimes happens by
the starting of the Quoins, he mends it, as I shewed in
¶ 7. of this §.
If a few Picks are got into the Form, that is, little
bits of Paper, Skin or Film of Inck, Grease or other
filth which may stick to the Face, or get into the
hollows of the Letter, he with the point of a Needle
picks them out: But if many be gotten in, he takes
off the Form and Washes it, as shall hereafter be
shewed.
And though he every other Sheet overlook the
Heap (as was said before) yet his Companion that Pulls,
by an habitual use casts his eye upon every single
Sheet; Yet rarely hinders his riddance by it, for
while he is taking the Sheet off the Tympan, he gives
a quick spreading glance upon it, and lays it down,
as was shewed ¶ 15. of this §, unless he perceive
somewhat to mend: For then he lets it lye on the
Tympan till he has mended what was amiss.
And that he may Take Inck more equally, to keep
the Balls of an equal Fatness, he keeps the Rubb’d out
Inck on the Inck-block of an equal Fatness; which to
do, he with the under-edge of the bottom of the
Brayer, draws often from the mass of Inck a small,
(and as near as he can guess) an equal quantity of
Inck, viz. about the quantity of a Pea, and with the
Brayer Rubs and disperses that Inck of an equal thickness,
all over the hither corner of the Inck-block.
While this is doing he holds the Balls upright on one
another in his Left Hand, leaning the Handle of
the uppermost Ball-stock against his Breast.
The equal and often Taking of Inck in a small
quantity, and constant Destributing of the Balls, is
the onliest means to keep the Heap throughout of an
equal Colour, and to avoid Beating of Fryers.
5. If he meets with naughty Sheets in his Work;
as torn, or stain’d, &c. he Prints them not, but
throws them under the Paper-bench; and if any
crease or wrinkles be in any Sheet, he laying the backs
of his four Left Hand fingers upon a smooth place
in the Sheet, rubs with the backs of the Nails of his
Right Hand Fingers from-wards him upon the wrinckles,
till he have smoothened them.
6. And though his constant care is to Lay every
particular Sheet even upon the Heap, yet it often
happens either through White Pages that may come
in the Form, which because not Printed lye solid on
one another, the unequal pressing of one side or end
of the Paper, or the unequal Bearing of the Plattin
on one side or end of the Form; I say it often happens
by these accidents, that the Heap, as it grows
higher is on one part of the Sheet raised above, and
on another part sunk below an Horizontal level: It
is raised higher on that side or end of the Heap most
prest in the Tympan, and by consequence makes the
Paper there more Huffie; Because deep pressure of
the Letter into the Paper below the common level
of the Sheet bears the Paper off from the Heap, on
the underside the Sheet; and the greater the number
of Sheets are thus Printed off and laid on the Heap,
the more that side or end of the Heap shall Rise:
And by the Rule of Contraries, when White Pages
come in the Form, the greater number of Sheets laid
on the Heap, shall where those White Pages lye,
make the Heap lower in that place, because they
clap solider together, for want of Printing the Paper
through the backside level of each Sheet: So that
the small un-level lying of every Sheet, though unperceptable,
in a small number of Sheets, makes each
Sheet incline to the lowest side of the Heap, and as
the Heap accumulates heighth, throws the Heap
more or less towards the dripping side, or end over
the bottom of the Heap.
To remedy which, he claps the insides of both his
Hands against both the ends of the Heap, but more
forcibly against the Hanging over end towards the
other end, till he has drove the Heap into an upright
position.
If either of the sides hang over, he with the inside
of his Left Hand commonly against the farther side
of the Heap, and the outside of his Right Hand fingers
on the hither side the Heap, either draws the
hanging over side towards him with his Left Hand,
or thrusts it from him with his Right Hand fingers,
as aforesaid, while his opposite Hand does the office
of a stop, that it be not drawn too forward, or thrust
too much backward. Then where the Heap rises
above the Level, he with the inside flats of one or
both of his Hands presses it down into an Horizontal
Plain.
7. If it be a Reteration he Works, and a great
Number is laid on, he uses a Tympan-cloath instead
of a Tympan-sheet: This Tympan-cloath is a Fine and
even Linnen Cloath, about an Inch or two larger on
every side than the Paper he Works on: He Wets this
Cloath and wrings the Water out again, so that it
remains only moist: Then lays his Cloath instead
of his Tympan-sheet, and Pastes the corners of the under
side of it to the Tympan, and Works upon it as
on a Tympan-sheet.
One reason why he uses a Cloath to Work the
Reteration on rather than a Sheet of Paper, is, because
a Sheet of Paper quickly wears out, which a
Cloath will not do. Another reason is, that when
the Inck that wrought off the White Paper Sets off
upon the Tympan Cloath, it may in clean Ly be washt
clean again: For a good Press-man will not Work on
a foul Tympan Cloath or (if he use no Cloath) on a foul
Tympan-sheet, because as the Inck of the White-paper
aforesaid, set off on the Tympan Cloath, so the more
the Tympan Cloath has gathered Inck from the White-Paper,
the more it will Return or give back again,
towards the besmearing of every Sheet that is Printed
on it.
The reason why the Press-man does not use a
Cloath to Work the White Paper with, is, because
in Working the White-Paper, the use of the Tympan-Sheet
is principally to lay all the Sheets of the Heap
even by, as being of the exact size with all the rest
of the Heap, which a Tympan-Cloath is not, nor
could it, without great trouble, be reduced to that
size by the Press-man, or if reduced to that size,
without much difficulty be laid even or square on
the Tympan: Because the Cloath when Wet, will be
hard to be kept straight and square, but every side
will naturally run into irregularities, which a Sheet of
White Paper will not do.
8. Sometimes, through the loose Hanging of the
Plattin on its Cords, or through the much wearing
of the Hose, or the Garter, or the Worms in the Nut
and Spindle, or the irregular wearing of the Toe of
the Spindle in its Nut, or too much play of the Tennants
of the Head in their Mortesses, or the irregular
dryness of the Tympan, or through irregular Runing
in of the Carriage, It will happen that the Letter
will Double upon the Sheets, that is, Print double.
If the loose Hanging of the Plattin be the cause,
it is easily mended by turning about the Female Screws
fitted to the tops of the Hose, as was shewed ¶ 4. of
this §.
If the Hose be worn, or the square holes the Hose
Works in, it may for the present be botcht up by putting
Scaboards between the Hose and the square holes
of the Till; but to mend it perfectly either another
Till must be made, or a new Hose, or both.
If the Garter be worn too wide; the Smith must
either mend the Old, or make a new one.
If the Worms of the Nut or Spindle be worn, the
Spindle must be examin’d by the Smith, and made true,
and have a new Nut Cast on it.
If the Toe of the Spindle and its Nut, or either of
them be worn irregularly, it is Smiths Work to
mend.
If the Tennants in the Head have too much Play
in their Mortesses; which though it seldom happens,
yet if the Head were not made of well seasoned Stuff,
the Tennants may be subject to shrink, and so have
too much play. There is no substantial remedying
this fault, but by making a new Head.
If an unproper temperature of the Tympan be the
cause; that is, when it is dry in one place and moist
in another, the dryed place may by its spring force
the Paper against the Face of the Letter, and in part
Print it before it come to feel the force of the Plattin;
(but this is rather slurring than Doubling) and when
the force of the Plattin does come, the spring in the
dryed part will again remove the Paper, and the
force of the Plattin gives its full Impression where
the Paper is thus removed, but when it is real Doubling,
it happens generally on the whole Sheet.
This Doubling or Slurring is mended, by reducing the
dryest part of the Tympan to an equal moist temperature
with the moistest.
Doubling often happens in the middle of the Form,
and the reason is, because the foreside of the Plattin
Prints beyond the middle of the Form at the first
Pull, and the hindside of the Plattin by the Second
Pull reprints part of the First Pull: So that a Spring
in the Tympan removes the Paper in this interval of
Time.
This fault is mended by exact observing the Runing
in of the Carriage.
Doubling may also happen by the too loose and
flapping straining of the Tympan, when it was first
Drawn.
This cannot be mended without taking the Tympan
off, and Drawing on a new one.
A Press-man having Pull’d a Sheet, may by some
accident (either of Object or Discourse) let it ly on the
Form after he has Run-out the Carriage, and afterwards
forget it was Pull’d, yet may perhaps lift the
Tympan a little off the Form, which lifting off (if the
Joynts are not very good) will remove the Sheet, if
then he Pull it again, it will Double.
This fault because it is but an accident I shall pass
by, and only say,
If the Joynts are so faulty (as sometimes Old
Joynts are) that the Press-man cannot keep Register
with them, the Smith must make new or mend the
Old.
9. When the Press-man leaves Work at Noon, he
draws half the Nails out of the Balls, and takes the
Wooll out: Then doubles the loose half of the Leather
over the remaining Nail’d-on half, with the Incky
sides of each half next each other, and Rowls up the
Leathers close, and laies them in a Bowl or Pan of
Water to Soak till he has Din’d.
He also covers the Form with the Tympan, to keep
it from dust or filth that may fall on it: And takes
out the Blankets and lays them on the Heaps: And
with a Spunge Wet in Water besprinkles the backside
of the Tympan, to Soak it whiles he is at Dinner.
Coming again to his Work afternoon, he takes
the Handles of the Ball-stocks between his Thighs,
(being seated as before, when he knockt up the Balls,
¶ 10.) to hold them fast, and he takes the turn’d
down backsides of the Ball-leathers in both his hands,
(for the other side being all over Black, would black
his Hands) and rubs them between his Fingers very
well, to supple them. Then squeezes and Wrings
the Water well out again; and Teizes his Wooll, by
opening all the hard and almost matted knots he finds
in it: but he does not pull the Wooll or hardned
knots in it assunder from the whole mass of Wooll:
But endeavours to keep the Wooll of each Ball intirely
connected in the same mass, and only opened,
to Loosen and Soften it: For pulling the knots to
pieces, would tear the Wooll, and soon make it unfit
for use. Having Teazed the Wooll he Knocks up
his Balls again, as I shewed in ¶ 10.
Then he goes to the Tympan, and squeezing his
Spunge as dry as he can, he rubs it over the backside
of the Tympan, to Suck up the Water, that may lye
on it.
Then taking the Blankets, he rubs them between
both his Hands to soften them; for we must suppose
that the Mornings Pulling on them has compacted
and hardned them: being well Rub’d, he lays them
in the Tympan again, as was shewed before in ¶ 7.
and falls again to his Afternoons train of Work.
Having wrought all day, though his Form be not
Wrought off, it may yet be Foul, so that he must Wash it:
Nay, in small Letter a good Press-man will Wash his
Form twice a day: Wherefore he calls to the Boy to
Heat the Ly, somewhat before he is ready for it,
about a Heating time: And having a Shooting-stick
lying by him on the Till or some other convenient
place, drives every Quoin between the Furniture and
the Chase fast up; least they may have somewhat
shrunk, or else started back: Then with a piece of
Chalk he makes a score on the two farthermost
Corners of the Carriage; and through the Quoins
droven against them, and upon the two Corners of the
Carriage of the Tympan and their Quoins, and lets
the Quoins ly; but he Unlocks all the opposite Quoins,
and takes them out of their places; laying those
Quoins that he takes from between the fore-end of
the Carriage and the Chase on the hithermost upper
long side of the Plattin, the hithermost Quoin on
the hithermost side of the Plattin, and the farthermost
Quoin on the farthermost side of the Plattin;
with their small ends towards him, and fromwards
him as they lay on the Carriage. The Quoins that he
takes from the hither side of the Carriage, he lays on
the hithermost Return side or end of the Plattin;
that on his Left Hand on the Carriage, towards the
farther Corner of the Plattin, and that Quoin on the
Right Hand on the Carriage, towards the hither
corner of the Plattin, with their small ends towards
the Hand they lay on, on the Carriage.
Having taken out and placed these four Quoins,
he tryes if the Form will Rise, as was shewed § 22.
¶ 7. then takes up the Form, and carries it to the
Ly-Trough, and lays it in it, even as the Compositer
brought the Form to the Press, and laid it on the
Press-stone. § 22. ¶ 7. and taking the Ly Kettle, or
Chafer, in his Left Hand pours the Ly Scalding hot
place by place over the whole Form: And then
with the ends of the Hair of the Ly Brush rubs gently
over the whole Form: And as he thus Rubs with
his Right Hand Rocks the Ly-Trough a little on its
Axis, that the Body of Ly may accompany the Ly-Brush
in its progress from the hither to the farther
side of the Form: And thus he Washes the Form still
on, till he perceive the Face of the Letter purely
clean.
Then he lets the Ly out again into the Ly-Kettle
at the Hole and Pipe in the Left Hand hither corner
of the Ly-Trough: and stopping the hole again, sets
by the Ly-Kettle. Then with a Dish or two of fair
Water he Rinces off the Laver of the Ly that may ly
on the Face of the Letter, and rears up the Form and
throws a Dishful or two of fair Water on the backside
of it, to Rince it also. Then takes the Form
out of the Ly-Trough, and sets it by, shelving with its
Face against the Wall, to Dry.
If the Heap be Wrought off, he lets the Compositer
know it, to take Charge of it.
Having Wrought off his Heap, he takes it off the
Paper-bench, and sets it by on the floor, covering it
with a Waste-sheet: And gives notice to the Boy,
or to the Ware-house-keeper, to fetch it away and
Hang it up to Dry.
Then he draws the Balls, and takes the Blankets
out of the Tympan (as at Noon:) And if he have
Paper to Wet, Wets it as was shewed ¶ 9. of this §.
The Warehouse-keeper takes the Heap out of the
Press-room, and carries it into the Warehouse,
or other Drying-place, and setting it upon a Form
or Bench of convenient heighth, with an end of the
Heap from him, he takes the Handle of the Peel in
his Left Hand, and lays the Board flat down upon
the Heap, with the Left Hand side of the Board towards
the Left Hand side of the Heap, and so as its
upper edge may reach to almost three quarters of
the length of the Sheet, and that the Right Hand
end of the Peel may ly on the middle of the Heap:
Then with his Right Hand he doubles over so much
of the Heap as he thinks good, perhaps about a
Quire, or half a Quire, or about seventeen Sheets,
more or less, either as he can allow them time to Dry,
or have room on his Racks to Hang them on. Having
thus doubled his first Doubling on the Heap, he removes
the Left Hand half of the Peel almost off the
Heap, viz. to about two Inches within the Left Hand
side of the Heap, and doubles, as before, a second
Doubling to hang over the first Doubling, towards the
Left Hand about two Inches, as aforesaid, on the
Peel, and as near as he can guess, the same number
of Sheets. And having these two Doublings on his
Peel, he takes the Peel off the Heap, and holding
the Handle a little aslope, that the Shorter Folding-over
of the Sheets may open from the Peel, he lifts
it up, and places it at one end of his first Rack, and
lets it hang on it, by drawing the Peel from under the
Paper. In like manner he Loads and unloads his
Peel again successively, till he have Hung up the whole
Heap. See Plate 31.
Plate 31
Note, that the sides of the Sheets do not hang against
one another, but lap over one another, as you
may see by Plate 31. Nor are they Hung up to
Hang with their edges against the side of the former
Hanging-up, but to lap over, so as every Right Hand
Doubling may lap about two Inches over the Left
Hand Doubling; that when the Books are taken down,
the Warehouse-keeper clapping the flat side of his Peel
against the Right Hand edge of the Paper, slides several
Doublings over one another (perhaps three or
four:) And putting the Peel under them, takes them
off the Racks, and lays them on the Heap again, on
a clean Waste Paper, and sets the Heap orderly by,
till it comes to be Gather’d.
The Warehouse-keeper is also very careful to lay all
the Sheets, so as the respective Signatures of every
Sheet may ly exactly over the respective Signature
of the first Sheet, lest when the Books come to be
Gathered, some Sheets may be Turned, which will
give him a great deal of trouble to Turn them right
when he Colations the Books.
Plate 32.
Laying the Heaps is to place them on Benches or
Forms of a convenient Heighth, in an orderly Signatural
Succession. By an orderly Signatural succession,
I mean the first Signature, which most commonly
is A (and therefore shall be so accepted) be
placed on the Left Hand of the Bench, with either
the Side or Foot of the Page, as the Volumn requires,
that hath the single Signature A at the bottom of
it upwards, and towards the hither side of the
Bench. On the Right Hand side of the Heap A is
B, and next it C, in like order D E F, &c.
Gathering of Books is to take one Sheet off every
Heap, beginning at the last Heap first, viz. at the
Left Hand end of the Range. The Gatherer takes
it off with his Right Hand, and disposes the hither
end of the Sheet into his Left Hand, clapping his
Left Hand Thumb upon the middle of the Sheet,
to hold it fast. Then he takes a second Sheet off
the second Heap from the Left Hand, viz. towards
the Right; and lays the second Sheet on the first,
and so successively a third, a fourth, a fifth, &c.
till he has Gathered the last Sheet on his Right
Hand; still observing to lay the middle of each
Sheet under his Thumb, and all the single Signatures
on each Sheet orderly and successively on
one another.
Thus he Gathers on, till one of all the Heaps
Comes off; which when it does, he Doubles or
Quires up all the other Heaps, and lays them by till
he can Bundle and Tye them up; which when he has
also done, he writes upon them Imperfections of (the
Title of the Book) and Writes on it the Signature of
the Sheet that is Wanting, and sets it by in a convenient
place of the Warehouse, that he may have recourse
to it on any occasion.
Though I shewed how he Gathered the Books, yet
shewed not how he Knocks them up and Folds them:
Wherefore,
Having thus Gathered one Book, he Knocks it up,
that is, he carries it to a Table provided on purpose
near him; and taking the ends of the Book between
the two Bows of the Thumb and Fore-finger
of each Hand, he grasps the ends loosly between
them, and placing the hither long side or edge of
the Book on the plain of the Table, he lifts the
whole Book a little above the plain of the Table,
(about an Inch or two, more or less) and while the
whole Book is held loosly by its ends, lets it fall gently
down on the Table, that the edges of such
Sheets as may stand out, or lower than the rest,
may be drove even with the rest of the edges of the
Book, and also that the edges of such Sheets as may
lye above the edges of the Book may be joulted
downwards, and lye even in the same Range with
the rest of the edges.
And as he is Knocking up the lower edge of the
Book, he at the same time evens the two ends of
the Book, by thrusting the Bows of his Thumbs and
Fingers against the ends of the Book, which being
loosely grasp’d, and the Bows of his Thumbs and
Fingers bearing pretty stiff towards each other;
will drive in the ends of such Sheets as may stick
out at either end; and so even the ends of the Book
at the same time.
Having thus even’d all the edges, he lays the
Book flat down on the Table, and holding one end
of it stiff and tight in his Left Hand, he rubs the
whole flat of his Right Hand hard upon the upper
Sheet, to press it and all the other Sheets as close
together as he can; then takes it up, and gives the
edges another or two gentle Knocks, as before; and
then Folds up, or Doubles the Book, according to its
respective Volumn.
If it be Folio, Quarto, Octavo or Sixteens, he Folds
it in the Short Cross; but if it be Twelves, Eighteens,
Twenty-fours, he Folds it in the Long Cross.
But most times before he Folds the Books he will
Colation them: (as shall be shewed by and by:) therefore
having Gathered the Book, he lays it by on a
Sheet of Waste Paper, and Gathers a second Book as
he did the first, and lays that flat open on the first,
then Gathers a third, fourth, fifth Book, &c. as before,
and lays them successively on each other, till
he have raised an Heap of Books so high, that he
grows cautious of laying more on, lest its heighth
should exceed his management. Then Gathers on,
and raises another Heap or Heaps till one of the Signatures
comes off.
The Colationing of Books, is,
First, To examine whether the whole number of
Sheets that belong to a Book are Gathered in the Book.
Secondly, To examine that two Sheets of one
sort are not Gathered.
Thirdly, To examine whether the proper Signature
of every Sheet lye on its proper corner of the
Gathered Book.
To do this, The Colationer provides himself with
a Bodkin; which is nothing else than a pretty thick
Sowing Needle, (most commonly broken-eyed,) having
its thick end thrust fast into a round piece of
Wood, about the thickness of a Tobacco-Pipe, and
about three or four Inches long.
Now having the Heap of Gathered Books before him,
with the single Signature A lying upwards on his
Right Hand, and his Left Arm cross the Heap, and
his Hand near the Signature corner, with his Bodkin
in his Right Hand, he pricks up the corner of the
first Sheet A, and at the same moment he pricks it
up, slips the Balls of his two Fore-fingers of his Left
Hand, and secures it from falling back again on the
Gathered Heap of Books between his Thumb and
hinder Joynt of his Fore-finger, and immediately
pricks into the Sheet B, casting his Eye upon the
Signature, as well to see that it is B, as to see that
it is singly B, and not B 2, B 3, &c. For if the single
Signature lye not on the same corner of the
Heap, the Sheet must be turned till it do. In like
manner he picks up and receives C D, &c. still casting
his Eye that it be the right Letter, and single
Signature, as aforesaid.
If he finds two Sheets of the same Signature, he
takes one out and lays it by, or else on the Heap, if
they be not all Gathered.
If he finds one Sheet wanting, he fetches that
Sheet from the Heap; or if he want it at the Heap
the Book is laid by as Unperfect till he have Colationed
the whole Impression of Books, to see if he can make it
Perfect with some other Book, that may have two of
the same Sheets Gathered in it.
Having examined that his Book is Perfect, he
Knocks and Folds it up, as was shewed in the last ¶.
Having Gathered, Colationed and Folded these
Books, he Tells them, to see how the Impression Holds
out; and as he Tells them, he lays a set number of
Books (if the Books be Thick, five, if Thinner, Ten,
if very Thin, twenty five or fifty) with the Folded
Side or Back one way, and the same Number of Books,
with the Folded or Back-side the other way, viz. the
edges of the latter number of Books upon the Backs
of the former Number: As well to distinguish and
Count the Number of Books readily, as to keep the
Bundle in a flat and Horizontal position. For if the
Backs of the Quired Books in a Bundle, should lye all
one way, the Fold of the Back being more or less
hollow in the middle of each Book, will in a Number
of Books, by springing upwards, mount the Backs;
and consequently the edges of the Books in the
Bundle will be depressed, so that in a great
Bundle the Books will be subject to slide off
one another.
These Books being thus Counted, he sets them by
on Waste Paper in convenient Piles, viz. Piles of about
three or four Reams high (according as the Paper
may be thicker or thinner) he sets them by (I
say) in Piles of equal Numbers, Range by Range,
till the whole Impression is set by.
And before he Tyes them up, he puts them into
the Standing Press, placing in it so many Books as the
Press will hold, both in width and Heighth; observing
to set in every Pile he puts Range by Range into
the Press, an equal number of Books, that each
Pile may equally feel the force of the Screw.
Then with a strong Iron Bar he turns about the
Spindle as oft he can, with his main Strength to
Squeeze and Press the Books as close and tight as he
can together: and so lets them stand in Press about
a Day and a Night. Then takes them out, and in
like manner puts in more Books, till the whole Impression
is Prest. See Plate 32.
As he takes each number of Books, he Tyes them
up with Packthred, lays a Waste Paper under and
upon each Bundle; and if the Master-Printer Printed
the Impression for Himself, he writes the Title of
the Book, and number of the Books on the uppermost
Waste Paper, and sets them by square and orderly
on the Shelves in the Warehouse, to deliver them
out according to the Master-Printers order. But if
the Impression were Printed for an Author, or a Book-seller,
he sends them to the Authors or Book-sellers,
without writing on the uppermost Waste Paper.
Plate 33
Each Ream of Paper contains twenty Quires:
These twenty Quires are by the Paper-makers so disposed
that the Back or Doubling of each Quire lyes
upon the opening or edges of the next Quire: For
reasons given in the last ¶.
Two of the twenty Quires in a Ream are called
Cording Quires, viz. the two Out-side Quires; because
the whole Ream is Corded or Tyed up between them.
They are also called Cassie Quires, because they serve
for Cases to the Ream. These Quires are by the Paper-maker
made up of torn, wrinckled, stained, and otherwise
naughty Sheets; yet does not perhaps the
whole Quire consist of such Sheets, but commonly
some good Sheets are in Culling found among them,
as shall be farther shewed by and by.
The Warehouse-keeper therefore when he Sets out
Paper, lays by the uppermost Cording Quire, and
then nimbly snatches with his Right Hand at the
back of the next Quire, and if the back lys towards
him, draws it into his Left Hand with the edges
of the Quire towards his Fingers; but if the back lye
from him, nimbly turns it while it is coming to his
Left Hand, and so again nimbly snatches at the back
of the succeeding Quires, placing their backs all one
way on the First Quire in his Left Hand, till he have
Counted or taken off of the Ream a Token; which Token,
if it be set out for Half a Press, viz. a Single Press-man,
is generally but five Quires, and is indeed often
called Half a Token: But if it be for an Whole Press,
it contains Ten Quires. This Token he lays by near
him, upon a Waste Sheet of Paper, and again applies
himself to Set out the next Token in the same manner,
but lays the next Token with the backs of the Quires
over the edges of the former Token, and thus Sets out
so many Tokens as his Heap requires, yet always considers
how his Paper Holds out, whether five and
twenties, or but four and twenties: If it Holds out
five and twenties, he Sets out in every Fourth, Fifth,
or Sixth Token Eleven Quires, to secure the Impression
to Hold out. If but four and twenties, he Sets out
Eleven Quires, in every second Token, and at last a
Quire more to the whole Heap to make good the
wanting Sheets of every Quire, and to make Proves,
Revises, Register-Sheets, Tympan-Sheets, and to supply
other accidents that may happen at the Press,
either by naughty Sheets, or Faults committed in
Beating, Pulling, Bad Register, &c. for all or any of
these accidents that happens to a Sheet, the Press-man
doubles it, and lays by in the Heap as Waste, as
I shewed § 24. ¶ 18. (4) and still he remembers, as
aforesaid to lay by the two out-side Quires of every
Ream; and at last lays on the Heap another Waste
Sheet of Paper, and so brings it to the Press to be
Wet.
The Culling the Cording Quires, is, to examine
every Sheet one by one. To do it, he lays the Cording
Quires, or many Cording Quires open before him
against the Light, and takes up every Sheet successively
and observes the goodness of it: Such Sheets
as he finds good, he lays on his Right Hand, and
the Bad on his Left. If a Sheet have but a little
corner torn off, viz. so much as he judges the Book-binder
would take off with his Plow, to make the
Leaf square with other Leaves, he accounts that
a good Sheet: But if more be torn off, he lays it by
for Bad; and so he does Wrinckled and stain’d Sheets.
Having thus Cull’d all the Cording Quires, he tells
out the good Paper into Quires, allowing five and
twenty to the Quire, if the Quires of the Ream hold
out five and twenty; or else but into four and twenty.
And the good Paper thus Cull’d, he tells into an
Heap or Heaps, as far as it will go.
But yet the careful Warehouse-keeper will not give
the Press-man this Culd Paper to Print at the begining
or end of a Book, but disposes that Heap or Heaps
so as they may be used about the middle of the Book:
For though we call’d it good Paper, yet it very rarely
happens to be so beautiful as the Inside Quires.
The Bad Paper he also Tells out into Quires, but
allows no more than four and twenty Sheets to the
Quire, because it is commonly set by in the Warehouse
to be sold.
It is also the Office of the Warehouse-keeper to keep
a Day Book, and in it to set down what Books he
Sells, and for how much, and to whom, and whom
by order of the Master-Printer he Trusts with Books,
and for how long Time; that so the Master-Printer
may as oft as he pleases have an account how the
Impression, or part of it, is disposed of.
Every Printing-house is by the Custom of Time
out of mind, called a Chappel; and all the
Workmen that belong to it are Members of the Chappel:
and the Oldest Freeman is Father of the Chappel.
I suppose the stile was originally conferred upon it
by the courtesie of some great Churchman, or men,
(doubtless when Chappels were in more veneration
than of late years they have been here in England)
who for the Books of Divinity that proceeded from
a Printing-house, gave it the Reverend Title of
Chappel.
There have been formerly Customs and By-Laws
made and intended for the well and good Government
of the Chappel, and for the more Civil and orderly
deportment of all its Members while in the
Chappel; and the Penalty for the breach of any of
these Laws and Customs is in Printers Language called
a Solace.
And the Judges of these Solaces, and other Controversies
relating to the Chappel, or any of its Members,
was plurality of Votes in the Chappel. It being
asserted as a Maxim, That the Chappel cannot Err.
But when any Controversie is thus decided, it always
ends in the Good of the Chappel.
1. Swearing in the Chappel, a Solace.
2. Fighting in the Chappel, a Solace.
3. Abusive Language, or giving the Ly in the
Chappel, a Solace.
4. To be Drunk in the Chappel, a Solace.
5. For any of the Workmen to leave his Candle
burning at Night, a Solace.
6. If the Compositer let fall his Composing-stick, and
another take it up, a Solace.
7. Three Letters and a Space to lye under the
Compositers Case, a Solace.
8. If a Press-man let fall his Ball or Balls, and another
take it up, a Solace.
9. If a Press-man leave his Blankets in the Tympan
at Noon or Night, a Solace.
These Solaces were to be bought off, for the good
of the Chappel: Nor were the price of these Solaces
alike: For some were 12 d. 6 d. 4 d. 2 d. 1 d.ob.
according to the nature and quality of the Solace.
But if the Delinquent prov’d Obstinate or Refractory,
and would not pay his Solace at the Price of
the Chappel; they Solac’d him.
The manner of Solacing, thus.
The Workmen take him by force, and lay him on
his Belly athwart the Correcting-stone, and held him
there while another of the Work-men, with a Paper-board,
gave him 10 l. and a Purse, viz. Eleven blows
on his Buttocks; which he laid on according to his
own mercy. For Tradition tells us, that about 50
years ago one was Solaced with so much violence,
that he presently Pissed Blood, and shortly after dyed
of it.
These nine Solaces were all the Solaces usually and
generally accepted: yet in some particular Chappels
the Work-men did by consent make other Solaces, viz.
That it should be a Solace for any of the Workmen
to mention Joyning their Penny or more apiece
to send for Drink.
To mention spending Chappel-money till Saturday
Night, or any other before agreed time.
To Play at Quadrats, or excite any of the Chappel
to Play at Quadrats; either for Money or Drink.
This Solace is generally Purchas’d by the Master-Printer;
as well because it hinders the Workmens
work, as because it Batters and spoils the Quadrats:
For the manner how they Play with them is Thus:
They take five or seven more m Quadrats (generally
of the English Body) and holding their Hand
below the Surface of the Correcting Stone, shake them
in their Hand, and toss them up upon the Stone, and
then count how many Nicks upwards each man
throws in three times, or any other number of times
agreed on: And he that throws most Wins the Bett
of all the rest, and stands out free, till the rest
have try’d who throws fewest Nicks upwards in so
many throws; for all the rest are free: and he pays
the Bett.
For any to Take up a Sheet, if he receiv’d Copy-money;
Or if he receiv’d no Copy-money, and did Take
up a Sheet, and carryed that Sheet or Sheets off the
Printing-House till the whole Book was Printed off
and Publisht.
Any of the Workmen may purchase a Solace for
any trivial matter, if the rest of the Chappel consent
to it. As if any of the Workmen Sing in the Chappel;
he that is offended at it may, with the Chappels
Consent purchase a penny or two penny Solace for
any Workmans singing after the Solace is made; Or
if a Workman or a Stranger salute a Woman in the
Chappel, after the making of the Solace, it is a Solace of
such a Value as is agreed on.
The price of all Solaces to be purchased is wholly
Arbitrary in the Chappel. And a Penny Solace may
perhaps cost the Purchaser Six Pence, Twelve Pence,
or more for the Good of the Chappel.
Yet sometimes Solaces may cost double the Purchase
or more. As if some Compositer have (to affront
a Press-man) put a Wisp of Hay in the Press-mans
Ball-Racks; If the Press-man cannot well brook
this affront, he will lay six Pence down on the Correcting
Stone to purchase a Solace of twelve Pence
upon him that did it; and the Chappel cannot in Justice
refuse to grant it: because it tends to the Good of
the Chappel: And being granted, it becomes every
Members duty to make what discovery he can: because
it tends to the farther Good of the Chappel: And
by this means it seldom happens but the Agressor
is found out.
Nor did Solaces reach only the Members of the
Chappel, but also Strangers that came into the Chappel,
and offered affronts or indignities to the Chappel,
or any of its Members; the Chappel would determine
it a Solace. Example,
It was a Solace for any to come to the Kings Printing-house
and ask for a Ballad.
For any to come and enquire of a Compositer, whether
he had News of such a Galley at Sea.
For any to bring a Wisp of Hay, directed to any
of the Press-men.
And such Strangers were commonly sent by some
who knew the Customs of the Chappel, and had a mind
to put a Trick upon the Stranger.
Other Customs were used in the Chappel, which
were not Solaces, viz. Every new Workman to pay
half a Crown; which is called his Benvenue: This
Benvenue being so constant a Custome is still lookt
upon by all Workmen as the undoubted Right of the
Chappel, and therefore never disputed; yet he who
has not paid his Benvenue is no Member of the Chappel,
nor enjoys any benefit of Chappel-Money.
If a Journey-man Wrought formerly upon the
same Printing House, and comes again to Work on
it, pays but half a Benvenue.
If a Journey-man Smout more or less on another
Printing House, and any of the Chappel can prove it,
he pays half a Benvenue.
I told you before that abusive Language or giving
the Lye was a Solace: But if in discourse, when any
of the Workmen affirm any thing that is not believed,
the Compositer knocks with the back corner of his
Composing-stick against the lower Ledge of his Lower
Case, and the Press-man knocks the Handles of his
Ball-stocks together: Thereby signifying the discredit
they give to his Story.
It is now customary that Journey-men are paid
for all Church Holy days that fall not on a Sunday,
Whether they Work or no: And they are by Contract
with the Master Printer paid proportionably
for what they undertake to Earn every Working
day, be it half a Crown, two Shillings, three Shillings,
four Shillings, &c.
It is also customary for all the Journey-men to
make every Year new Paper Windows, whether the
old will serve again or no; Because that day they
make them, the Master Printer gives them a Way-goose;
that is, he makes them a good Feast, and not
only entertains them at his own House, but besides,
gives them Money to spend at the Ale-house or Tavern
at Night; And to this Feast, they invite the
Correcter, Founder, Smith, Joyner, and Inck-maker,
who all of them severally (except the Correcter in his
own Civility) open their Purse-strings and add their
Benevolence (which Workmen account their duty,
because they generally chuse these Workmen) to the
Master Printers: But from the Correcter they expect
nothing, because the Master Printer chusing him, the
Workmen can do him no kindness.
These Way-gooses, are always kept about Bartholomew-tide.
And till the Master-Printer have given
this Way-goose, the Journey-men do not use to Work
by Candle Light.
If a Journey-man marry, he pays half a Crown to
the Chappel.
When his Wife comes to the Chappel, she pays six
Pence: and then all the Journey-men joyn their two
Pence apiece to Welcome her.
If a Journey-man have a Son born, he pays one
Shilling.
If a Daughter born, six Pence.
The Father of the Chappel drinks first of Chappel
Drink, except some other Journey-man have a Token;
viz. Some agreed piece of Coin or Mettle markt by
consent of the Chappel: for then producing that Token,
he Drinks first. This Token is always given to him
who in the Round should have Drank, had the last
Chappel-drink held out. Therefore when Chappel-drink
comes in, they generally say, Who has the Token?
Though these Customs are no Solaces; yet the
Chappel Excommunicates the delinquent; and he
shall have no benefit of Chappel-money till he have paid.
It is also Customary in some Printing-houses that
if the Compositer or Press-man make either the other
stand still through the neglect of their contracted
Task, that then he who neglected, shall pay him that
stands still as much as if he had Wrought.
The Compositers are Jocosely call’d Galley Slaves:
Because allusively they are as it were bound to their
Gallies.
And the Press-men are Jocosely call’d Horses: Because
of the hard Labour they go through all day
long.
An Apprentice when he is Bound pays half a
Crown to the Chappel, and when he is made Free, another
half Crown to the Chappel; but is yet no
Member of the Chappel; And if he continue to
Work Journey-work in the same House, he pays another
half Crown, and is then a Member of the
Chappel.
A Founding-House is also call’d a Chappel: But I
suppose the Title was originally assum’d by Founders,
to make a Competition with Printers.
The Customes used in a Founding-House are made
as near as may be to those of a Printing-house: but because
the Matter they Work on, and the manner of
their Working is different, therefore such different
Customes are in Use, as are suitable to their Trade, As
First, To call Mettle Lead, a Forfeiture.
Secondly, A Workman to let fall his Mold, a Forfeiture.
Thirdly, A Workman to leave his Ladle in the
Mettle Noon or Night, a Forfeiture.
The Printers of London, Masters and Journey-men
have every Year a general Feast, which since the
re-building of Stationers Hall is commonly kept there.
This Feast is made by four Stewards, viz. two Masters
and two Journey-men; which Stewards, with
the Collection of half a Crown apiece of every Guest,
defray the Charges of the whole Feast; And as they
Collect the Half-Crowns, they deliver every Guest
a Ticket, wherein is specified the Time and Place
they are to meet at, and the Church they are to go
to: To which Ticket is affixed the Names and Seals
of each Steward.
It is commonly kept on or about May-day: When,
about ten a Clock in the Morning they meet at
Stationers Hall, and from thence go to some Church
thereabouts; Four Whifflers (as Servitures) by two
and two walking before with White Staves in their
Hands, and Red and Blew Ribbons hung Belt-wise
upon their left Shoulders. These go before to make
way for the Company. Then walks the Beadle of
the Company of Stationers, with the Companys Staff
in his Hand, and Ribbons as the Whifflers, and after
him the Divine (whom the Stewards before ingag’d
to Preach them a Sermon) and his Reader.
Then the Stewards walk by two and two, with
long White Wands in their Hands, and all the rest of
the Company follows, till they enter the Church.
Then Divine Service begins, Anthems are Sung,
and a Sermon Preached to suit the Solemnity: Which
ended, they in the same order walk back again to
Stationers Hall; where they are immediately entertain’d
with the City Weights and other Musick:
And as every Guest enters, he delivers his Ticket
(which gives him Admittance) to a Person appointed
by the Stewards to receive it.
The Master, Wardens and other Grandees of the
Company (although perhaps no Printers) are yet
commonly invited, and take their Seats at the upper
Table, and the rest of the Company where it
pleases them best. The Tables being furnsh’d with
variety of Dishes of the best Cheer: And to make the
entertainment more splendid is Usher’d in with Loud
Musick. And after Grace is said (commonly by
the Minister that Preach’d the Sermon) every one
Feasts himself with what he likes Best; whiles the
Whifflers and other Officers Wait with Napkins,
Plates, Beer, Ale, and Wine, of all sorts, to accommodate
each Guest according to his desire. And to
make their Cheer go cheerfuller down, are entertained
with Musick and Songs all Dinner time.
Dinner being near ended, the Kings and the Dukes
Healths is begun, by the several Stewards at the several
Tables, and goes orderly round to all the
Guests.
And whiles these Healths are Drinking, each Steward
sets a Plate on each Table, beginning at the upper
end, and conveying it downwards, to Collect
the Benevolence of Charitable minds towards the
relief of Prinners Poor Widows. And at the same
time each Steward destributes a Catalogue of such
Printers as have held Stewards ever since the Feast
was first kept, viz. from the Year of Christ 1621.
After Dinner, and Grace said, the Ceremony of
Electing new Stewards for the next Year begins:
Therefore the present Stewards withdraw into another
Room: And put Garlands of Green Lawrel,
or of Box on their Heads, and White-wands in their
Hands, and are again Usher’d out of the withdrawing
Room by the Beadle of the Company, with the Companys
Staff in his Hand, and with Musick sounding
before them: Then follows one of the Whifflers
with a great Bowl of White-wine and Sugar in his
Right Hand, and his Whifflers Staff in his Left:
Then follows the Eldest Steward, and then another
Whiffler, as the first, with a Bowl of White-wine and
Sugar before the second Steward, and in like manner
another Whiffler before the Third, and another
before the Fourth. And thus they walk with Musick
sounding before them three times round the
Hall: And in a fourth round the first Steward takes
the Bowl of his Whiffler and Drinks to one (whom
before he resolved on) by the Title of Mr. Steward
Elect: And taking the Garland off his own Head
puts it upon the Steward Elects Head. At which
Ceremony the Spectators clap their Hands, and such
as stand on the Tables or Benches, so Drum with
their Feet that the whole Hall is filled with Noise, as
applauding the Choice. Then the present Steward
takes out the Steward Elect, giving him the Right
Hand, and walks with him Hand in Hand, behind
the three present Stewards another Round about the
Hall: And in the next Round, as aforesaid, the
second Steward Drinks to another with the same
Ceremony as the first did; and so the Third Steward,
and so the Fourth, and then all walk one Round more
Hand in Hand about the Hall, that the Company
may take notice of the Stewards Elect. And so ends
the Ceremony of the Day.
This Ceremony being over, such as will go their
ways; but others that stay, are Diverted with Musick,
Songs, Dancing, Farcing, &c. till at last they all
find it time to depart.
A DICTIONARY,
Alphabetically explaining the abstruse
VVords and Phrases that are used in
Typography. VVhich also may serve as
an Index to direct to the most material
Concerns contained in this Volumn.
Though I give you a Dictionary of so many
Words and Phrases as are mentioned in these
Exercises, yet I do not exhibit this as a Dictionary
so perfect, that all the obstruce
Words and Phrases used among Printers, Letter-cutters
and Founders are here exposed; for Words
and Phrases many times offer themselves either as
Discourse or Contemplation occurs: Therefore such
Words and Phrases as have escaped my Consideration,
will, I hope, be discovered by some Printer, or
others, that may have a kindness for Posterity; not
only in this Trade, but in all Trades and Faculties
whatsoever: That so a Dictionary may in time be
compleated, that may render so great a number of
Words used in England by English-men intelligible;
which now for want of a proper Repository to store
them in, seem not only Aliens to our Nation, but
barbarous to our Understandings.
A
Abreviations are Characters, or else marks on Letters,
to signifie either a Word or Syllable. & is the
Character for And, e is The abreviated, t is That
abreviated; and several other such. Straight stroaks
over any of the Vowels abreviates m or n. They
have been much used by Printers in Old Times, to
Shorten or Get in Matter; but now are wholly left
off as obsolete.
Accented Letters are much used in Latin Authors,
and more in Greek. The Vowels are only accented,
and are called Grave, thus accented à; Acute, thus
accented á; Circumflex, thus accented â; and Deerecis,
thus accented ä.
Accents are Dashes or Marks over the Vowels.
Air-hole. See § 18. ¶ 1.
Ascending Gage. See § 12. ¶ 5.
Ashes.Letter-Founders call the Skimmings of their
Mettle, and the Sweepings of their House Ashes;
and save both, to send to the Refiners; who with
their fierce Fire draw all the Mettle out of the Ashes.
See Fat Ashes. See Lean Ashes.
Ash-hole. See § 18. ¶ 1.
Assidue is Thin Brass Plate, such as adorns Bartholomew-Fair
Hobby Horses: Founders use it to
Underlay the Body, or the Mouth-piece, &c. of their
Mold, if it be too Thin. See § 16.
B
Back of a Composing-stick. See § 9. ¶ 4.
Backside of the Form is the underside that touches
upon the Correcting-stone or Press-stone.
Bad Copy. See § 24. ¶ 4.
Bad work. Any Fault at the Case, or Press, or at
the Furnace, or at the Dressing-block, &c. is in Workmens
Language called Bad Work.
Bake. See § 22. ¶ 10.
Balls. See § 24. ¶ 10.
Ball-knife. An old blunt-edg’d Knife, that Press-men
lay by, to scrape their Balls with.
Ball-leathers. See § 24. ¶ 10.
Ball-Nails. The Nails that Ball-leathers are Tackt
to the Ball-stocks with.
Ball-stocks. See § 11. ¶ 21.
Balls Take. See § 11. ¶ 21.
Beak. See § 12. ¶ 2.
Beam. See § 12. ¶ 4.
Beard of a Letter, is the outer angle of the Square
Shoulder of the Shank, which reaches almost up to
the Face of the Letter; and is commonly scraped
off by the Founder: As in § 2. ¶ 2.
Beard-Gage. See § 13. ¶ 4.
Bearer. See § 4. & § 24. ¶ 7.
Beat. See § 24. ¶ 13.
Beat Fat. If a Press-man Takes too much Inck
with his Balls, he Beats Fat. The Black English Faced
Letter is generally Beaten Fat.
Beat Lean, is to Take but little Inck, and often:
All Small Letter must be Beaten Lean.
Bed. See § 24. ¶ 2.
Benvenue. See Ancient Customs.
Bite. See § 24. ¶ 7.
Blankets. Woollen Cloath, or White Bays, to lay
between the Tympans.
Blocks. See § 20. ¶ 3.
Block-Groove. ibid.
Body. See § 1. ¶ 2. & § 15. ¶ 1.
Botching Matrices. See § 17. ¶ 3.
Bottom line. See § 14. ¶ 2.
Bottom of the Matrice. See §. 17. ¶ 1.
Bottom Plate. See §. 15. ¶ 1.
Bow. See § 15. ¶ 1.
Brace, is a Character Cast in Mettle thus marked
The Compositer is to have these Cast of several
Breadths, viz. to several numbers of Lines of a designed
Body (most commonly of Pica Body) that they
may hook in or Brace so many Lines as his Copy
may shew him; as at Charge is a Brace of four
Lines. See also § 24. ¶ 1.
Brass-Rules. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Brayer is a round Wooden Rubber, almost of the
fashion of a Ball-stock, but flat at the bottom, and not
above three Inches Diameter: It is used in the Inck-Block
to Bray or Rub Inck.
Break, a piece of a Line. Also the Mettle that is
contiguous to the Shank of a New Cast Letter: This
Break is formed in the Mouth-piece of the Letter-mould,
and is called a Break, because it is always broke
from the Shank of a Letter.
Breaking off is breaking the Break from the Shank
of the Letter. See § 19. ¶ 3.
Brevier. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Broad-side, a Form of one full Page, Printed on one
side of a whole Sheet of Paper.
Broken Letter. By broken Letter is not meant the
breaking of the Shanks of any of the Letters, but the
breaking the orderly Succession the Letters stood in
in a Line, Page, or Form, &c. and mingling the Letters
together, which mingled Letters is called Py.
Bur. See Rag.
C
Cannon. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Card. When several Bodies of Letter are Set in a
Page, Compositers to Justifie that Page to an exact
Length, put a Card to some White-line, or other
Break and Lengthen out the Page the thickness of a
Card. And Press-men also use a Card for an underlay.
See § 22. ¶ 4. &c. § 24. ¶ 7.
Cards. About a Quire of Paper, which Press-men
use to Pull down the Spring or rising of a Form,
which it is many times subject to by hard Locking-up.
See § 24. ¶ 4.
Carriage, is a part of the Press. For which See § 10.
¶ 9. It is also a part of the Letter-Mold: For
which See § 15. ¶ 3.
Case. See § 3.
Case lies. See § 22. ¶ 1.
Case is full, viz. a Case full of Letter, wanting no
Sorts.
Case is Low. When a Case grows empty, Compositers
say the Case is Low.
Case Stands still. When the Compositer is not at
Work at his Case, it is said, The Case stands still.
Cassie Paper. See § 25. ¶ 5.
Cast, is to Cast Letter. See § 19. ¶ 1.
Cast off Copy. See § 22. ¶ 9.
Catch of the Bar. See § 11. ¶ 11.
Chappel. See Customs.
Charge, is to fill
Paper with great Pages. a Page with long and many Lines.
a Line with many Letters.
a Pot with Stubs and Antimony.
Chase. See § 9. ¶ 6.
Cheeks, is a part of the Press; for which See § 10.
¶ 2. and part of the Dressing-block-groove. For
which See § 20. ¶ 3.
Choak. If a Form be not Washt in due time, the
Inck will get into the Hollows of the Face of the
Letter: And that getting in of the Inck is called
Choaking of the Letter, or Choaking of the Form.
Claw of the Sheeps-foot. See § 11. ¶ 20.
Clean Proof. When a Proof has but few Faults in it,
it is called a clean Proof.
Close Matter.Matter with few Breaks or Whites.
Close Work. ibid.
Colation Books. See § 25. ¶ 4.
Come. When the Face and Shank of a Letter is
Cast perfect, Founders say, It Comes well; if unperfect
they say, It does not come, or It comes not well.
Come Down, the Toe of the Spindle is said to Come
down by Pulling the Bar: So is the Bar when it is
Pull’d near the hither Cheek: Also, the Press-man is
said to Come down the Form with his Balls: For which
See § 24. ¶ 13.
Companion. See § 24. ¶ 15.
Comes off. A Form that receives a good Impression,
Comes off well, if a bad Impression, it Comes off ill, or
it Comes not well off. Also a phrase used in Gathering
of Books; for a Heap that is Gathered off is said to
Come off. See § 25. ¶ 3.
Composing Rule. See § 24. ¶ 4.
Compositer. He that Composes or Sets the Letters.
Composing-stick. See § 9. ¶ 4.
Copy-money. See Customs.
Cording-quire. See § 25. ¶ 5.
Correct. When the Corrector reads the Proof, or the
Compositer mends the Faults he markt in the Proof,
they are both said to Correct; the Correcter the
Proof, the Compositer the Form.
Correcting-stone. See § 6.
Corrections. the Letters markt in a Proof are call’d
Corrections. See § 22. ¶ 8.
Counter Punch. See § 13. ¶ 2.
Counting off Copy. See § 22. ¶ 9.
Coyns. See § 8.
Cramp Irons. See § 11. ¶ 15.
Cross Long, Short. See Chase.
Cull Paper. See § 25. ¶ 5.
Cut the Frisket. See § 24. ¶ 7.
D
Dance. See § 22. ¶ 7.
Dele. See § 23.
Destribute. See § 22. ¶ 3.
Destributing-stick. See ibid.
Devil. The Press-man sometimes has a Week-Boy
to Take Sheets, as they are Printed off the Tympan:
These Boys do in a Printing-House, commonly black
and Dawb themselves; whence the Workmen do Jocosely
call them Devils; and sometimes Spirits,
and sometimes Flies.
Direction, the word that stands alone on the
Right Hand in the bottom Line of a Page.
Direction-line. The Line the Direction stands in.
Double Letter. æ œ st sh, and several others Cast
on one Shank are called Double Letters: ſ and f have
several Ascending Letters joyned to them, because
their Beaks hanging over their Stems would (were
they not Cast on one Shank) ride upon the tops of the
Stems of the adjoyning ascending Letter.
Double. A Sheet that is twice Pulled and lifted
never so little off the Form after it was first Pulled,
does most commonly (through the Play of the Joynts
of the Tympan) take a double Impression: This Sheet
is said to Double. Or if the Press-man Run in so, as
the Fore-side of the Plattin Print with the First Pull
into part of the Second Pull, or the hind edge of the
Plattin Print with his Second Pull into part of his
First Pull; either of these twice Printing is called
Doubling. Doubling also happens through the loose
Hanging of the Plattin, and through too much play
the Tennants of the Head may have in the Mortesses
of the Cheeks, and indeed through many Wearings
and crasienesses that often happens in several parts
of the Press. See § 24. ¶ 18.
Dress a Chase, or Dress a Form, is all one. It is
to fit the Pages and the Chase with Furniture and
Quoins. See § 22. ¶ 7.
Dress Letter. See § 21. ¶ 1.
Dressing Block. See § 20. ¶ 3.
Dressing Block-groove. ibid.
Dressing Hook. See § 20. ¶ 1.
Dressing Knife. See § 20. ¶ 4.
Dressing Sticks. See § 19. ¶ 6.
Drive out. When a Compositer Sets Wide, he is said
to Drive out or Run out. In Founding, If Letter be
Cast too Thick in the Shank it Drives out, or if it be
Cast too Thick in any part of the Shank, as the Head,
the Foot, the sides at Head or Foot, or Body at Head
or Foot: They say, It Drives out at Head, It Drives
out at Foot, &c.
E
Empty Case. See § 22. ¶ 3. & See Case is Low.
Easie Pull. See § 24. ¶ 5.
Easie Work. See § 22. ¶ 4. And Great Letter and
a Small Form the Press-man calls Easie Work.
Empty Press. A Press that Stands by, which no
Workman Works at: Most commonly every Printing-House
has one of them for a Proof-Press: viz. to
make Proves on.
English Body. See § 1. ¶ 2.
English Face. Plate 26. 27. are English Face Letters.
Even Page. The First Page of a Sheet or Form is
called an Odd Page, but the Second, Fourth, Sixth,
or any other even numbred Page is called an Even
Page. See § 22. ¶ 7.
F
Face of a Letter, See § 13. ¶ 13.
Face of a Page, or Form. The Superficies of a Page
or Form, where the Faces of every Letter lies in the
same Plain.
Face-Gage. See § 12. ¶ 5.
Face of a Matrice. See § 17. ¶ 1.
Fat Ashes.Founders call their Ashes Fat, if they
are considerably Heavy, because then they have
much Mettle in them.
Fat. See Beat Fat.
Fat Face, or Fat Letter, is a broad Stemmed
Letter.
Female Gage, Screws, &c. The Hollow Gage, or
Hollow Screw that receives its Match Gage or Screw,
&c.
First. See § 24. ¶ 15.
First Form. The Form the White Paper is Printed
on, which generally by Rule ought to have the First
Page of the Sheet in it.
First Page. See § 22. ¶ 7.
First Pull. See § 11. ¶ 16. & § 24. ¶ 7. Considerations
8. & § 24. ¶ 15.
Flat-Gage. See § 12. ¶ 3.
Flat Table. See § 12. § 8.
Fly. See Devil.
Follow. viz. See if it follows, is a Term used as well
by the Corrector as by the Compositer and Press-man.
It is used by the Corrector and Compositer when they
examine how the beginning Matter of a succeeding
Page agrees with the ending Matter of the precedent
Page: And how the Folio’s of those Pages properly
and numerically follow and succeed one another,
Lest the Pages should be Transposed. But the Press-man
only examines that the Folio and beginning word
of the Second Page, and Signature of the First and
Third Page (when the Reteration is on the Press) follows
the Folio and Direction of the First Page, and
the Signature of the Third Page follows the Signature
of the First Page, orderly according to the Volumne,
lest the Form should be laid wrong on the Press.
Foot of the Letter. The Break-end of the Shanck of
a Letter.
Foot-line. See § 14. ¶ 12.
Foot of a Page. The bottom or end of a Page. See
§ 22. ¶ 7.
Form. The Pages when they are fitted into a Chase.
Foul Proof. When a Proof has many Faults markt
in it.
Fount. Is the whole number of Letters that are Cast
of the same Body and Face at one time. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Frisket. See § 10.
Froze out. In Winter when the Paper is Froze, and
the Letter Froze, so as the Workmen cannot Work.
They say, They are Froze out.
Fryer. When the Balls do not Take, the Un-taking
part of the Balls that touches the Form will be left
White, or if the Press-men Skip over any part of the
Form, and touch it not with the Balls, though they
do Take, yet in both these cases the White places
is cal’d a Fryer.
Full Form or Page. A Form or Page with few or
no Breaks or White-lines.
Full Press. When two Men Work at the Press. It
is called a Full Press.
Furnace. See § 18.
Furnace open, or Wind Furnace. See § 18. ¶ 2.
Funnel. See § 18.
Furniture. See § 8.
G
Gage. Gages mentioned in this Volumne have an
adjunct Name, as Flat Gage, Joynt Gage, Italick
Gage, Long Gage, Male Gage, Short Gage, Standing
Gage, Steel Gage, which See respectively.
Galley. See § 5.
Galley-Slave. See the Customs.
Gallows. See § 10.
Garter. See § 11. ¶ 14.
Gather Books. See § 25. ¶ 3.
Geat, is the little Spout or Gutter made in the Brim
of Casting Ladles.
Get in.Matter is Got in in a Line, Page, Sheet or
Book, if Letter be Thinner Cast than the Printed
Copy the Compositer Sets by. Or Matter is Got in if
the Compositer Sets Closer: Or if he Widens his Measure;
or puts more Lines in a Page. See a Line.
Girts. See § 11. ¶ 21.
Good Colour. Sheets Printed neither too Black or
too White.
Good of the Chappel. Forfeitures and other Chappel
Dues are Collected for the Good of the Chappel, viz.
to be spent as the Chappel approves.
Good Work, is called so in a twofold sense: The
Master-Printer calls it Good Work when the Compositers
and Press-men have done their duty; and the
Work-men call it Good Work, if it be Light Easie
Work, and they have a good price for it.
Go up the Form. See § 24. ¶ 13.
Great Cannon. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Great Numbers. See Lay on. Above 2000 Printed
on one Sheet are accounted Great Numbers.
Great Primmer. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Gutter-stick. See § 8.
H
Hag. See § 15. ¶ 1.
Half a Line. When Letter Drives out or Gets in in
the Body, in a number of Lines, Founders say, It
Drives out or Gets in Half a Line, a whole Line, a quarter
of a Line, &c. viz.Half a Body, a whole Body, a quarter,
&c. of a Body.
Half a Press. When but one Man Works at the
Press, It is called Half a Press.
Half Work. He that Works but three days in the
Week, does but Half Work.
Hammer end of a Punch. See § 13. ¶ 13.
Hangs. See Letter Hangs. & § 22. ¶ 4.
Hang the Plattin. See § 24. ¶ 4.
Hang up Paper. See § 25. ¶ 1.
Hard Inck.Inck very well Boyled. See § 11. ¶ 23.
Hard Justifying. See § 22. ¶ 4.
Hard Pull. See § 24. ¶ 5.
Hard Work. See § 22. ¶ 4. And small Letter and
a Large Form, Press-men call Hard Work.
Head. See § 10. ¶ 5.
Head Line. See § 14. ¶ 2.
Head of a Page. The top or beginning of a Page.
See § 22. ¶ 7.
Head-stick. See § 8.
Heap. So many Reams or Quires as is Set out by
the Warehouse-keeper for the Press-man to Wet, is
call’d a Heap: But then it is call’d a Dry Heap, till
the Press-man have Wet it, and then it is indeed called
a Heap. See also § 25.
Heap holds out. When it hath its full intended
Number of Sheets.
Heavy Work. See Hard Work.
Heighth. See High against Paper.
High against Paper. If a Punch be not Sunk deep
enough into the Matrice, the Letter Cast will not
stand high enough against Paper. And if it be Sunk
too deep into the Matrice, the Letter Cast will be
too High against Paper. See § 17. ¶ 2.
Holds out, or Holds not out. These Terms are
applicable to the Quires of White-paper, to Wrought-off
Heaps, to Gathered Books, and to sorts of Letter
&c. If Quires of White Paper have twenty five
Sheets a piece in them, they say, The Paper holds
out five and twenties. Of Wrought off Heaps, the
Heap that Comes off first in Gathering is said, Not to
Hold out. Of Gathered Books, if the intended number
of perfect Books are Gathered, they say the Impression
Holds out: But if the intended number of
Perfect Books cannot be Gathered off the Heaps, they
say the Impression Holds not out. And so for Sorts of
Letter, either when it is in the Founding House, or
in the Printing House.
Hole. By a Hole, in Printers dialed, is meant and
understood a place where private Printing is used,
viz. the Printing of Unlicensed Books, or Printing
of other mens Copies. Many Printers for Lucre of
Gain have gone into Holes, and then their chief
care is to get a Hole Private, and Workmen Trusty
and Cunning to conceal the Hole, and themselves.
Holy-days. See Customs.
Hollows of a Letter. The Sinking in of the Counter-Punch
into the Punch makes these Hollows, so does
Sculping into the Face of the Punch. See § 9. ¶ 4.
Hooks. See Hags.
Horse. The Form or Bench Press-men set the Heaps
of Paper on. See also Customs.
Horse-flesh. If any Journeyman set down in his
Bill on Saturday Night more Work than he has done,
that Surplusage is called Horse-flesh: And he abates
it in his next Bill.
Hose. See § 11. ¶ 14.
Hours.Press-men reckon their Work by Hours,
accounting every Token to an Hours Work: And
though it be the same effectually with Tokens, yet
they make their prizes of different Work by the
Hour; and it passes current for a Token. If two Men
Work at the Press ten Quires is an Hour; if one
Man, five Quires is an Hour.
I
Jaws. See § 15. ¶ 6.
Imperfections of Books. See § 25. ¶ 3.
Imperfections of Letters. When the Founder has not
Cast a proportionable number of each sort of Letter,
the wanting Letters are called Imperfections, as making
the rest of the Fount unperfect. See Sorts.
Impose. See § 22. ¶ 7.
Impression holds out. See Holds out.
In-Page. See Out-Page.
Insertion. If the Compositer have left out Words or
Lines, the Corrector inserts it, and makes this mark
ʌ where it is Left out, which is called the mark for
Insertion. See § 23.
Joynt flat Gage. See § 14. ¶ 4.
Joynts. See § 10. ¶ 9.
Inner Tympan. See § 11. ¶ 10.
Italick Gage. See § 12. ¶ 6.
Justifie a Matrice. See § 17. ¶ 2.
Justifie a Mold. See § 16.
Justifie a Stick, viz. a Composing-stick. See § 22. ¶ 4.
K
Keep in, is a caution either given to, or resolved on,
by the Compositer, when there may be doubt of
Driving out his Matter beyond his Counting off, wherefore
he Sets close, to Keep in.
Keep out, is a caution either given to or resolved
on, by the Compositer, when there may be doubt of
Getting in his Matter too fast for his Counting off:
Wherefore he Sets Wide, to Drive or Keep out.
Kern. See § 19. ¶ 5.
Kerning-Knife. See § 19. ¶ 5.
Kerning-stick. See § 19. ¶ 5.
Knife backt Sculptor, is a Sculptor with a thin edge
on its back.
Knife-file. A file with a thin edge.
Knock up Balls. See § 24. ¶ 10.
Knock up Books. See § 25. ¶ 3.
Knock up a Letter. It sometimes happens with
old Letter, that a Letter may be worn so low that
it will not Print well in a Page: The Workman
then takes that Letter out of the Form, and holds
the Shank of it upon the side of the Chase, and with
the Head of the Shooting-stick beats lightly upon
the Foot of the Shank, till he have battered Mettle
enough out of the Shank, to raise it higher against
Paper: If it prove too high against Paper, he Rubs
the bottom of the Shank upon the side of the Chase
to rub it down: This Operation seldom happens,
unless another of the same sort of Letter is wanting,
and hard to come by: For else the Compositer will
bow the Letter, and pop it into a Waste Box in his
Case, where he puts all naughty Letters, that he
may not be troubled with them another time.
Knot. See § 20. ¶ 3.
L
Ladles. See § 18. ¶ 3.
Lay in Sheets. When the Press-man lays Sheets
on the Tympan, it is stiled Laying in Sheets.
Lay out Sheets. When the Press-man takes Sheets
off the Tympan, and lays them on the Heap, it is
stiled Laying out Sheets.
Lay on. A phrase used for the Number of Books
to be Printed. Thus they say, There is 1000,
2000, 3000, &c.Laid on. See Great Numbers. See
Small Numbers.
Lean Ashes. Founders call their Ashes Lean, if they
are Light; because then they have little Mettle in
them. See Fat Ashes.
Lean. See Beat Lean.
Lean Face. A Letter whose Stems and other
Stroaks have not their full width.
Lean Stroaks. The fine Stoaks in a Letter.
Leather Groove. See § 17. ¶ 2.
Letter-Board. See § 7.
Letter Hangs. If the Compositer has been careless
in Emptying his Composing-stick, so as to set the Letter
loosely down in the Galley, and they stand not perfectly
Square and Upright, the Letter Hangs: Or
if after Overrunning on the Correcting-stone he has
not Set his Letter in a Square position again, before
he Locks up, (for we may suppose when the Pages
are Open’d the Letter stands Loose, and more or
less out of Square) So then, the Matter standing
thus out of Square, is said to Hang. See § 22. ¶ 4, 7.
Light Work. See Easie Work.
Liner. See § 12. ¶ 7.
Lining-Stick. See § 16. ¶ 2.
Lock up. See § 22. ¶ 7. and § 21. ¶ 1.
Long Cross. See Chase.
Long Gage. See § 12. ¶ 5.
Long Primmer. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Long Pull. See § 24 ¶ 5.
Loose Justifying. See § 22. ¶ 4.
Low against Paper. See Heigth against Paper.
Low Case. When the Compositer has Compos’d almost
all his Letters out of his Case, he says his Case
is Low.
Lower Case. See § 3.
M
m Thick. See § 13. ¶ 1.
Make a Measure. See § 22. ¶ 4.
Make ready the Form. See § 24. ¶ 7.
Male Gage. The outer Gage, or outer Screw, that
enters or fits into its Match Gage or Screw, &c.
Mallet. See § 9.
Matrice. See § 17. ¶ 1.
Matter. The series of the discourse of the Compositers
Copy.
Measure. The width of a Page. See Composing-Stick.
Mettle. See § 18. ¶ 2.
Mold. See § 15. ¶ 1.
Monk. When the Press-man has not Destributed
his Balls, some splotches of Inck may lye on one or
more of them, which in Beating he delivers upon
the Form; so that the Sheet Printed on has a
black blotch on it: Which Blotch is called a
Monk.
Mouth-piece. See § 15. ¶ 1.
N
n Thick. See § 13. ¶ 1.
Naked Form, or Page, is when the Furniture is
taken from about all sides of the Form or Page. See
§ 22. ¶ 7.
Neck of a Letter. So much of the Punch as is Sunk
into the Matrice is called the Neck; and when that
Letter is Cast of Mettle, it is so much as comes above
the Square of the Shank, viz. above the Beard.
Nick. See § 15. ¶ 1.
Nomparel. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Notch of the Matrice. See § 17. ¶ 2.
Notes.Quotations down the side of a Page are called
Notes.
Number Laid on. See Lay on.
Nut of the Spindle. The Female Screw that receives
the Worms of the Spindle.
O
Odd Page. The First, Third, Fifth, Seventh, and
all un-even numbred Pages are Odd Pages.
Off. A Press-man usually says, I am off, meaning he
has Wrought off his Token, his Heap, his Form.
Open Matter. Full of Breaks and Whites.
Open Furnance. See § 18. ¶ 2.
Open the Form. See § 22. ¶ 2.
Open Work. See Open Matter.
Over-run. See § 22. ¶ 8.
Out. A Compositer usually says, I am Out, meaning
he has Set out his Page, Form, or Copy. See also § 23.
Out-Page. In Octavo’s, Twelves, Sixteens, every
Out-side Page in the Sheet is called an Out-Page, the
rest are called In-pages.
Out of Register. Bad Register. See § 24. ¶ 7.
P
Pale Colour. If there be not Blacking enough in the
Inck, or the Form be Beaten with too Lean Balls, the
Work will be said to have a Pale Colour.
Pallat. See § 15. ¶ 1.
Pan. The great Ladle that Founders melt their
Mettle in, when they are Casting Letters, is called the
Pan. See also § 9. ¶ 18.
Paper-bench. See Horse.
Paper-board. See § 7.
Paper the Case. See § 22. ¶ 1.
Paper Windows. See Customs.
Paper up Letter.Pages. See § 22. ¶ 10.
Pearl. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Peel. See § 11. ¶ 22.
Pelts. Sheep Skins untan’d, used for Ball Leathers.
Pica. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Picks. When either pieces of the Skin or Film that
grows on Inck with standing by, or any dirt get into
the Hollows of the Face of the Letter, that Film or
Dirt will fill or choak up the Face of the Letter, and
Print Black; and is called a Pick; because the Press-man
with the point of a Needle, picks it out.
Points. See § 11. ¶ 19. Also , ; : . - ? ! (’)
[ * § †, and other marks, are all by Printers and
Founders called Points.
Point-holes. The two Holes the Points prick in a
Sheet of Paper. See § 22. ¶ 7.
Point-Screws. See § 11. ¶ 9.
Press. See § 10.
Press-man. See § 24. ¶ 1.
Press goes. When the Press-men are at Work, the
Press is said to Go.
Press goes Hard, Heavy. See § 24. ¶ 5. and Press
goes Easie, Light.
Press stands still. When the Press-men are not at
Work, the Press is said to stand still.
Press-stone. See § 11. ¶ 17.
Proof. See § 24. ¶ 18.
Proof Letters. See § 16. ¶ 2.
Proof Press. See Empty Press.
Print Hand. See Plate 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17.
Pull—— Easie, Long, Short, Soft. See § 24. ¶ 5.
Punch. See § 13. ¶ 1.
Py. when a Page is broken, those broken Letters
are called Py. See Broken Letter.
Q
Quadrats. See § 19. ¶ 1.
Quarters.Quarto’s, Octavo’s and Twelves Forms are
Imposed in Quarters. They are called Quarters, not
from their equal divisions; but because they are Imposed
and Lockt up apart. Thus half the Short-Cross
in a Twelves Form is called a Quarter, though it be
indeed but one Sixth part of the Form.
Quoins. See § 8.
Quotation Quadrats, Are Cast the heighth of the
Quotation. They are Cast of different Bodies, that the
Compositer may have choice of them to Justifie his
Notes or Quotations exactly against the designed Line
of the Page.
R
Racks. See § 11. ¶ 22. & § 12. ¶ 19.
Rag. When Letter Cast has a Bur on any of its
edges, that Bur is called a Rag.
Register. See § 15. ¶ 1. & § 24. ¶ 7.
Register-sheet. The Sheet or Sheets Printed to
make Register with.
Reteration. The Second Form, or the Form Printed
on the backside of the White Paper.
Revise. See § 23.
Ribs. See § 10. ¶ 8. & § 11. ¶ 15.
Riglet. Is a sort of Furniture of an equal Thickness
all its Length. It is Quadrat high, of several Thicknesses,
viz. a Nomparel, Brevier, Long-primmer, Pica,
&c. Thick.
Rince the Form. See § 22. ¶ 2.
Rincing-Trough. The Trough Forms are Rinced in.
Rise. A Form is said to Rise, when in Rearing it off
the Correcting-stone no Letter or Furniture, &c. stay
behind. See § 22. ¶ 7.
Rounce. See § 11. ¶ 16.
Rowl up the Ball Leathers. See § 24. ¶ 18.
Rub Letter. See § 19. ¶ 4.
Rubs not. When the Shank is Cast too Thin, that in
Rubbing part of the Face or the Topping or FootingRubs away: Founders say, It does not Rub.
Rubs well. When the Shank of a Letter has a proper
Thickness, Founders say, It Rubs well.
Rub out Inck. See § 24. ¶ 11.
Rules. viz. Brass Rules. See § 2. ¶ 2.
Run in the Carriage. See § 24. ¶ 15.
Runs on Sorts, when Matter runs much on some
few Sorts of Letters, they say, it Runs on Sorts, See
Sorts.
Run out from Copy. See Drive out.
S
Scaboard. See § 8.
Second at the Press. See § 24. ¶ 15.
Second Pull. See § 11. ¶ 16. Considerations 8. &
§ 24. ¶ 15.
Sets Foul. See foul Proof.
Sets Clean. See Clean Proof.
Sets Close. See Get in.
Sets Wide. See Drive out.
Set out Paper. See § 25. ¶ 5.
Set the Rounce. See § 24. ¶ 3.
Sets off. Work that is newly Wrought off at the Press
often Sets off, especially if it be Fat Beaten with Soft
Inck: For when it comes to be Beaten, or sometimes
only hard prest by the Book-binder, the moist Inck
spreads and delates it self round about the Face of
every Letter, and sullies and stains the whole White
Paper.
Shake. See § 19. ¶ 1.
Shank, the square Mettle the Face of a Letter stands
on, is called the Shank of a Letter.
Sheeps-foot. See § 11. ¶ 20.
Shooting-stick. See § 9. ¶ 2.
Short-cross. See Chase.
Short-Page. See § 12. ¶ 5.
Side-stick. See § 8.
Signature. See § 22. ¶ 4.
Sinck Matrices. See Sinck Punches.
Sinck Punches. See § 17. ¶ 1.
Slice. See § 11. ¶ 11.
Sliding-Gage. See § 12. ¶ 4.
Sliding-Socket. See § 12. ¶ 4.
Small Numbers. Under 1500 Laid on is accounted
a Small Number. See Great Numbers; and See Lay on.
Smoak Vent. See § 18. ¶ 1.
Smout. Workmen when they are out of constant
Work, do sometimes accept of a Day or twos Work,
or a Weeks Work at another Printing-house: this
By-work they call Smouting.
Soaking Pull. See § 24. ¶ 5.
Soft Pull. ibid.
Soft Inck.Inck or Varnish moderately boiled. See §
11. ¶ 23.
Solace. See Customs.
Sop the Balls. When a Press-man has taken too much
Inck, he is said to Sop the Balls.
Sorts. The Letters that lye in every Box of the
Case are separately called Sorts in Printers and Founders
Language; Thus a is a Sort, b is a Sort, c is a
Sort, &c.
Space Thick, Space Thin. See § 12. ¶ 1.
Spindle. See § 11. ¶ 12. 16.
Spirit. See Devil.
Spring. See § 15. ¶ 1.
Squabble. A Page or Form is Squabbled when the
Letter of one or more Lines are got into any of the
adjacent Lines; or that the Letter or Letters are
twisted about out of their square Position.
Stem. The strait Flat stroaks of a straight Letter is
called Stem. See § 14. ¶ 1.
Stick. The Composing-stick commonly so called.
Stickfull. See § 22. ¶ 4.
Stiff Justifying. See § 22. ¶ 4.
Stirring-Pote. See § 18. ¶ 2.
Stoak-hole. See § 18. ¶ 1.
Stoaking-Rod. A Rod of thick Wyer put into such
an Handle as is the Handle of a Letter-Ladle. Founders
use it to stir up the Fire in the Furnace.
Stone. See § 19. ¶ 1.
Stool. See § 15. ¶ 1.
Stop. See § 19. ¶ 1.
Strip a Form. See § 22. ¶ 2.
Stroaks, are fat, lean, fine, hair. See § 14. ¶ 2.
Superiour Letters, are often set to Marginal Notes:
They are Letters of a Small Face, high Justifyed by
the Founder in the Mold near the Top-Line.
Swash-Letters. See Plate 15.
T
Tache. A small Board with Notches in its Fore-edge;
either nailed upon the Fore-edge of the Work-Bench,
or screwed into the Vice; so as the Notches may stand
forwards to rest the Shank of a Punch in. See § 12 ¶
9.
Tail of Letters. See § 14. ¶ 2.
Take off. See Customs.
Taking off. See § 22. ¶ 3.
Take up. See § 22. ¶ 3.
Take up a Sheet. See Customs.
Take Inck. See § 24. ¶ 10.
Teze Wooll, or Hair. See § 24. ¶ 18.
Thick Letter. A Fount of Letter that Rubs not high
enough into the Neck is called Thick Letter; and consequently
will Drive out Matter. See § 17. ¶ 2.
Thick Space. See § 13. ¶ 1.
Thin Space, ought by a strict orderly and methodical
measure to be made of the Thickness of the
seventh part of the Body; though Founders make
them indifferently Thicker or Thinner.
Throat. See § 15. ¶ 1. & 6.
Till. See § 10. ¶ 6.
Toe of the Spindle. See § 11. ¶ 12.
Token. See § 25. ¶ 5.
Token Sheet. See § 24. ¶ 9. 15.
Tongue. See § 20. ¶ 3.
Tooth of the Plow. The pointed edge that Cuts the
Groove in the bottom of the Shanks in the Blocks.
See § 21. ¶ 5.
Transpose. See § 22. ¶ 7. & § 23.
Turn for a Letter. It often happens when Matter
Runs upon Sorts, especially in Capitals, or some
other Sorts seldom used, that the Compositer wants
that Sort the Matter Runs on; wherefore he is loath
to Destribute Letter for that Sort; or perhaps his Case
is otherwise Full. Wherefore instead of that Letter
or Sort, he Turns a Letter of the same Thickness,
with the Foot of the Shank upwards, and the Face
downwards; which Turned Letter being easie to
be seen, he afterwards when he can accommodate
himself with the right Sort, takes out, and puts
the right Letter in its room. It is also a word used
jocosely in the Chappel, when any of the Workmen
complain of want of Money, or any thing else, he
shall by another Workman be answered, Turn for it,
viz. Make shift for it.
Tympan. See § 10. ¶ 10.
Tympan-Cloath. See § 24. ¶ 18.
Tympan-sheet. See § 24. ¶ 7.
V
Vantage. When a White-page or more happens in
a Sheet, the Compositer calls that Vantage: So does
the Press-man, when a Form of one Pull comes to
the Press.
Varnish. See § 11. ¶ 23.
Visorum. See § 22. ¶ 4.
Un-lock the Form. See § 22. ¶ 2.
Underlaid. A Phrase used by Press-men for the
Light and Easie, or Heavy and Hard Running in of
the Carriage. Thus they say, The Press goes light and
easie under Hand, or it goes heavy or hard under
Hand.
Upper Hand, when the Spindle goes soft and easie,
the Press-men say, It goes well under Hand, or
Above Hand. But the contrary if it goes Hard and
Heavy.
W
Wash the Form. See § 24. ¶ 18.
Way-goose. See Customs.
Weak-Inck. See Soft-Inck.
Wedge. See § 20. ¶ 3.
White-line. A Line of Quadrats.
White-Page. A Page that no Matter comes in.
White-Paper. Although the first Form be Printed
off, yet Press-men erronically call that Heap White-Paper,
till the Reteration be Printed.
Whole-press. See Full-Press.
Wind-furnace. See Open-furnace.
Wind-hole. See § 18. ¶ 1.
Wood. See § 15. ¶ 11.
Wyer. See § 15. ¶ 9.
FINIS.
TYPOGRAPHICAL CORRECTIONS
In
In
Page
Line
Original
Reprint
17
9
wieght
weight.
17
23
so
to.
19
15
witout
without.
20
23
thanthe
than the.
22
15
batttens
battens.
36
21
containiug
containing.
42
31
hyphen inserted after
Ten.
47
25
clapse
claspe.
51
15
an
and.
56
3
betwen
between.
63
7
Whether
Whither.
64
4
doublet of it corrected.
65
5
doublet of it corrected.
65
18
to
too.
70
19
Serews
Screws.
77
15
doublet of much corrected.
87
17
doublet of the corrected.
89
1
parenthesis inserted.
90
3
in
into.
92
9
parenthesis inserted.
103
12
Pnnch
Punch.
120
5
doublet of the corrected.
120
10
a
at.
136
30
peice
piece.
141
16
Bottome
Bottom.
145
9
he
the.
150
24
puuch
punch.
200
26
in
is.
211
17
nor
not.
213
24
Lettets
Letters.
221
26
n
in.
222
11
Rnn
Run.
237
16
a bout
about.
239
16
thrust
thrusts.
247
3
Chapher
Chapter.
247
11
Over-rnn
Over-run.
248
30
Fnrniture
Furniture.
253
7
proeeed
proceed.
267
16
performanee
performance.
276
2
hatdens
hardens.
294
24
Rnns
Runs.
297
6
wiIl
will.
303
15
Wot
Wet.
304
26
Srrong
Strong.
307
11
is
it.
307
27
Bnll
Ball.
308
6
Seeeps
Sheeps.
322
22
parenthesis inserted.
332
22
thc
the.
378
19
to
too.
391
8
o
§
392
9
a
§
393
6
ot
or.
NOTES
Title. At the Sign of Atlas. In Moxon’s time the houses in
London and elsewhere were not numbered. A house of business
was specified and identified by a sign painted with some peculiar
device that could be recognized by people who could not read.
The Portraits. Satisfactory authority cannot be given for
the accuracy of the portrait of Gutenberg. Moxon copied it
from an earlier German book. The portrait of Coster is a copy
of the print first shown by Scriverius in 1635. Van der Linde
doubts its genuineness. The portrait of Moxon may be accepted
as truthful. It first appeared in the fourth edition (1686) of
Moxon’s “Tutor to Astronomie and to Geographie.”
The Dedication. “The Right Reverend Father in God,
John, Lord Bishop of Oxford and Dean of Christ Church,” was
Doctor Fell, one of the three persons to whom this work was
dedicated. Doctor Fell had commended himself to men of
letters by a recent gift to the University of Oxford of printing
materials of great value. In a report written by him in 1679,
he mentions “the low estate of the manufacture of printing”
in England, and in the University, as the motive that induced
him and associate members of the University, in 1672, to take
“upon themselves the charges of the press in the said University,
and at the expence of above four thousand pounds furnisht
from Germany, France and Holland, an Imprimery, with
all the necessaries thereof, and pursued the undertaking so
vigourously, as in the short compass of time which hath since intervened
to have printed many considerable books in Hebrew,
Greek and Latin, as well as in English; both for their matter
and elegance of paper and letter, very satisfactory to the learned
abroad and at home.” Bagford said that the printing material
so presented by the Bishop could not be equaled by any of the
great printing-houses on the Continent. A specimen sheet of the
types of the Oxford University Press dated 1695 fully warrants
this assertion. The types, punches, and materials then given
by Bishop Fell are insufficiently described by Rowe Mores in his
“English Typographical Founders and Founderies,” on pages 44
and 45. A brief description of the Oxford Press as it now is,
with suitable illustrations, was published by the Oxford University
in 1894.
Bishop Fell was equally interested in paper-making. He encouraged
George Edwards, “a cutter in wood of the great letters,”
and an engraver of maps and other things made use of in
the printing of books, to set up a paper-mill at Wolvercote.
Bishop Fell died in 1686. Tom Brown made him the subject of
his famous epigram:
I do not love thee, Doctor Fell,
The reason why I cannot tell;
But this alone I know full well,
I do not love thee, Doctor Fell.
2, 3. The Origin of the Invention. Moxon’s notice of
the invention of typography records a general belief of the
writers of that time. The Coster legend had been published,
but it was not accepted as unimpeachable history. The weight
of authority favored the claims made for Gutenberg. The “Tullies
Offices” (Cicero, De Officiis) of 1465, printed by “Johanes
Hust” (Fust) and “Petri de Geurshem” (Peter Schoeffer of Gernsheim),
is one of the later books of these printers. The book
generally received as the one first printed is the Bible of Forty-two
Lines, which is at least ten years earlier. It is accepted
as the production of John Gutenberg, John Fust, and Peter
Schoeffer. Its claim to priority has been disputed in favor of
the Bible of Thirty-six Lines, accredited to John Gutenberg only.
Discredit is now given to the legend of the introduction of
printing in Oxford in 1468 by Frederick Corseles. “The Dictes
and Sayinges of the Philosophers,” printed by William Caxton
at Westminster in 1477, is considered as the first book printed in
England. The claims of Coster have been thoroughly sifted by
Dr. A. W. Van der Linde, and his earlier writings on this subject
have been translated into English by J. H. Hessels and published
under the title of “The Haarlem Legend.” The claims
of Caxton are fairly reviewed by William Blades in his “Life
and Typography of William Caxton.”
6, 7. The Branches of Typography. The specification
of Letter Cutters, Casters, and Dressers, of Compositors and
Correctors, Pressmen and Ink-makers, and some other trades,
indicates the complexity of the complete art of printing in 1683.
The workmen in each one of these trades tried to keep it distinct,
and to prevent its practice by any but those who had been
qualified by regular apprenticeship. There were few master-printers
who had even superficial acquaintance with the methods
and usages of the different departments of typography, and their
general ignorance tended to the degradation of the art. The
ordinary book of the seventeenth century was distinctly inferior to
a book of the same class of the sixteenth century that had been
made from the beginning under the direction of a master “who
could perform or direct others to perform” all the work upon it.
It was for the purpose of diffusing a proper knowledge of the
different processes among master-printers that this book was
written.
Advertisement on page 8. The plot here mentioned was
the one revealed by Titus Oates, who gave false details of an
alleged conspiracy to kill Charles II, King of England, and to
reëstablish the rule of the Roman hierarchy.
This advertisement is a side-light of value on the methods of
the book-selling trade. Moxon foresaw that the cost of the
complete book would be too much for the ordinary buyer. He
tempted subscriptions by offering it in monthly parts: “2d. for
each Printed Sheet. And 2d. for every Print taken off of Copper
Cuts.” At these rates the complete book on printing, unbound,
then cost 14s. 4d. The publishing of a book in parts was an old
expedient to increase sales. I first note it in an edition of the
Bible in Hebrew, published by Robert Stephens of Paris between
the years 1539 and 1544.
Copper-plates were preferred for the illustrations because they
could be engraved and printed more neatly and at a smaller
expense. The arts of engraving on wood and of woodcut presswork
were then in their lowest condition, and Moxon foresaw
that his illustrations engraved on wood would not be properly
printed.
9. Printing-house. Although “printing-house” is still
used in England as a proper designation for the workshop of
the master-printer, the term “printing-office,” which is more
common in the United States, has equally good authority.
Many of the early printers called their workshops by the Latin
name of “Officina.” A book before me by Jodocus Badius,
dated 1513, has the imprint “In Officina Ascensiana.”
10. The Cases and Press. The allowance of “four foot
and a half by five foot and a half” for every pair of double frames
or stands is the same as that established by modern usage. The
allowance of seven feet square of space for each press, which
necessarily includes the bank, and working-room for the two
pressmen, seems small. It indicates a press for the printing of
a sheet not larger than fifteen by twenty inches. The caution
to put the presses upon a solid foundation, and to brace them
with beams against the ceiling and side walls, shows that provision
had to be made for the shrinking of the wood and for its
imperfect construction.
11. Windows of glass were unusual. Paper (probably oiled)
to admit the light was the only defense against cold, which was
sometimes so severe that work had to be suspended. Then, as
now, printers preferred the upper floors of the building for composition,
and these upper floors were usually lighted by small
windows near the ceiling. The English printing-house of the
seventeenth century was rude, bare, and small. It was a large
printing-house that had four hand-presses and a dozen frames.
13. Font. Moxon’s etymology is not approved by recent
dictionary-makers, who tell us that font is derived from the
French fonte, a casting, through fondre, to melt or to found.
Font is now used to describe a complete collection of founded
types. The English face here mentioned as opposed to the
roman and italic must be understood as old English black-letter.
14. Sizes and Proportions of Type. Ten bodies of type
are specified as a full assortment of sizes from pearl to “great-cannon.”
Within this limit American and English type-founders
now make twenty-one sizes, as well as some smaller and
many larger sizes beyond the limit. The dimensions of the
bodies here specified are irregular fractions of the English linear
foot. An accurate or standard foot measure was not easily procured,
and the irregular subdivisions of the foot were calculated
with difficulty and often with error. Types so made were unavoidably
inexact; when made in different foundries they did
not accord in size, and there was often serious disagreement in
the bodies of the same foundry when the types were cast at different
times. For a specification of these variations, see Savage’s
“Dictionary of Printing,” page 802, and any recent English
work on practical typography.
Pick is the name given to any bit of dirt that falls in the
counter of a type, and fouls the print.
The geometric rules for the proportions of letters as laid down
by Moxon and other theorists are impracticable. They make no
provision for the meeting of irregularly shaped letters and no
allowance for optical illusions. To make letters seem harmonious
and symmetrical in combination, some characters must purposely
be out of drawing.
The commendation of Christophel Van Dijck (Christopher
Van Dijk) is approved by modern bibliographers and printers.
Willems, in his “Les Elzeviers,” rates him as the leading punch-cutter
of his time, and as really superior to the famous French
founders Sanlecque and Le Bé. The beauty of his designs, and
the merit of the type made by his Dutch successors in type-founding,
secured to them the practical control of the English
market for more than a century. During Moxon’s time, and for
many years after, British type-founders bought most of their
punches and matrices in Holland. William Caslon, who began as
a type-founder in 1720, was the first English punch-cutter who
broke the domination of the Dutch type-founders in England.
It was the first purpose of the writer of these notes to have
this book reprinted in the Dutch types that served Moxon for
models. Unfortunately, they were not to be had. They were in
the Enschedé foundry before 1735, but at that time they had
been put aside as old-fashioned and unsalable. M. Fleischman,
a German punch-cutter intrusted with the management of this
foundry, had destroyed as useless old metal most of the Van
Dijk punches and matrices. This wanton destruction should
not prejudice the reader against Fleischman, for he was an expert
punch-cutter, although the originator of a bad school of
typography. It was from him that Bodoni of Italy, Didot of
France, and Baskerville of England, drew their erroneous notions
of the superior beauty of over-sharp hair-lines. This peculiarity
is clearly shown in the new types of the specimen-book
of the Enschedé foundry for the year 1786, which contains a portrait
of Fleischman, and signed and dated specimens of his work
at that time.
15. The Face or Style of Van Dijk Types. “... the
commodious Fatness they [the Van Dijk letters] have beyond
other Letters, which easing the Eyes in Reading renders them
more Legible.” The word “fatness” cannot be understood as
printers now accept the word, for the Van Dijk letter would
now be rated as thin and much below the present standard of
width. It was supposed to ease the eyes in reading because the
interior counters of the small or round letters like e, o, and m
had been enlarged, but this enlargement was most in height.
“... the true placing their Fats and their Leans” means
the extension of thick-stroke to the corresponding shortening of
hair-lines, as may be seen in a comparison of the old-style m
with a modern m. This improvement was modified by Fleischman
and his successors. He protracted the hair-line and shortened
the thick-stroke, showing his own skill as a cutter, but
seriously damaging the legibility of the letter. This unwise
fashion is still in force in nearly all types of modern cut. The
bold and sturdy types of William Morris, and the Jenson types
of the Dickinson foundry, are practical protests (possibly too
emphatic) against the effeminacies of the modern school of weak
and delicate letter.
“... the sweet driving them into one another” I understand
as the close fitting of the different letters. This close fitting or
narrow set for each type, with a corresponding thinness of face,
made a composition unusually compact. The novelty of this
new style was most admired by French type-founders, who have
never allowed it to go out of fashion. Fournier, in his “Manuel
Typographique,” shows compressed types of many sizes, which
he says are “in the Dutch style.” The type used by Moxon in
his book is of the same English body as the type in which this
reprint is set, but the Moxon face is a trifle taller and much
more compressed.
The uniformity or geometrical accuracy of proportion that is
here commended in all sizes of Van Dijk types could not have
been made by careful drawing. Yet it does not appear that
Moxon had instruments of precision that could measure with
exactness any fraction smaller than the thirtieth part of an inch.
16. The Counters of Types. The deep cut or counter recommended
for punches is correct instruction, but deep counters
were uncommon. The punches that I have examined in the Plantin-Moretus
Museum have relatively shallow counters. Fertel of
St. Omer, writing in 1723, denounces the shallow counters then
made by all founders as a cause of the bad presswork of French
printers. Even Fournier (“Manuel Typographique,” vol. i, p.
12) says that a counter “about one fourth of a line” (.0222 of
the English inch) is deep enough for types between nonpareil
and long-primer or pica. No modern printer would be satisfied
with a counter of this depth.
17. Types made for Books. The few bodies of type then
made were for books only, and were provided in small fonts.
The types most largely cast now are those intended for newspapers:
brevier, minion, nonpareil, and agate, and they are provided
in fonts of many thousand pounds. Italic, which then
made at least one third, is now but one tenth of the entire weight
of the font. In many morning newspapers italic is excluded.
The Beard of a type was the long sloping shoulder that
connected the face with the body. The square and high shoulder
of modern types, which is of recent invention, is indispensable
for the proper moulding of types composed for stereotype
work.
18. Decay of Engraving on Wood. “Few or good Cutters
in Wood appear.” The decadence of engraving on wood is
plainly indicated by Moxon’s choice of copper-plate for all his
illustrations. The imperfect methods then in use for making
brass rules are also illustrated on many pages of his book, where
they show rules of unequal height and uneven face.
The “Planishing” of Brass Rule was the rolling of the
metal in sheets before it was cut in strips type-high.
19. The Lay of the Type-cases. The illustration of the
type-cases in plate 1 is apparently of a case in one piece, but the
text distinctly says that two cases were used, an upper and a
lower, as is customary now. The dimensions of the case, “two
foot nine inches long, one foot four inches and an half broad,”
are almost like those of the modern cases. These two cases
were unwisely placed on the stand at the same inclination, so that
they seem as one case in the illustration. The capital letters are
unhandily put in the extreme left-hand corner of the upper-case.
Arabic figures are at the foot of these capitals. There are no
small capitals, but the boxes of the right side of the upper-case,
of easiest reach, are filled with accents and astronomical signs.
The copy of the compositor was laid over these boxes that were
seldom used. To keep the copy near to the compositor’s eye, the
hand in search of frequently used capitals had to make a needless
length of reach.
The lay of the lower-case, as shown in plate 1 (b, c, d, e, f, g,
in the upper row of large boxes; l, m, n, o, p, q, in the second
row; r, t, u, in the lowest row), is an indication that the first
printer laid the letters of the lower-case as we now lay the capitals
of the upper-case, in alphabetical order. When it had been
demonstrated that the letters were unequally used, and that the
characters in most request should be near the compositor’s hand,
the letters a, h, and the thick spaces took the places occupied by
sorts not so often needed. The lay of the case and the size of
the boxes in Moxon’s plan, and indeed in all modern plans, are
not in proper position or proportion to give the greatest convenience
to the compositor. Many attempts have been made to
correct these faults, but none have succeeded. In this plan, as
in other plans maintained by compositors of our time, tradition
is stronger than reason. To this day the larger boxes of modern
cases contain the same sorts and are in the same position as those
of Moxon’s plan.
25. The Galley described in plate 2 is the modern slice-galley.
The long tray-galley of wood and the long proof-galley
of brass are not mentioned. It must have been customary for
each compositor to make up his matter on a slice-galley as soon
as he had completed his page. When composition was so managed
the difficulty of keeping two or more men at work on the
same book must have been great.
28. A Correcting-stone “four foot and an half long, and
two foot broad” ... as “a convenient size for the generality
of Work” is another indication of the small size of the forms.
28. Scabbord is an old spelling of scabbard or scale-board,
which was once a thin strip or scale of sawed wood. The difficulty
of sawing wood to uniform thickness led to the use of
strips of thin iron, which were cheaper and more even as to
thickness. The name that had been given to the wood was continued
for the iron. Scabbards were also used as aids in justifying
forms and in making register. The scabbards mentioned
in printers’ grammars of the last century were of cardboard or
millboard.
Gutter-sticks are so called because of the groove cut in the
center, constructed after the fashion of a gutter for the drainage
of water. The groove was needed to prevent the bagging of the
tympan and the blacking of the white paper in the operation of
presswork. The grooving of gutter-sticks is still maintained,
although there is now no need for the groove.
Quoins “about three inches square” are not to be found in
any modern printing-office.
31. The “Dressing-block” is now known as the planer,
but the form of planer now in greatest use is usually two
and one half inches high and eight and one half inches long.
“Sheers, such as Taylors use,” were common tools in all
printing-houses fifty years ago, but they have been supplanted
by simple machines that cut brass rule with more accuracy.
32. The Earliest Composing-sticks were veritable sticks
of wood. The Plantin-Moretus Museum, at Antwerp, has preserved
several of these venerable implements. The stick illustrated
by Moxon with a bottom plate, which he calls the back,
is one inch narrower than the stick now used in English and
American printing-houses. In other features no serious difference
can be noted. The sliding measure, now known as the
knee, was then made in two parts for the composition of type in
two distinct measures—one for the text and one for the marginal
notes. The iron would now be adjudged too thin, and the soldering
on of a head-plate of long-primer thickness would not be
tolerated. The suggestion that the sliding measures, or the
knees, could be filed when they proved untrue leads us to the
inference that these frail composing-sticks soon became inexact.
34. A Chase “two and twenty inches long and eighteen
inches broad” is the proper size for a form of crown paper fifteen
by nineteen inches. This, we must suppose, was the size of
paper in greatest use. The construction of the Moxon chase is
substantially like that of the modern chase, but the iron used
was thinner, and the method of hand-filing recommended for the
making of squares and dovetails could not have been entirely
satisfactory. The old chase must have been weak and easily
bent or twisted out of square.
37. The Press in greatest use in England during the first
half of the seventeenth century is the one shown in plate 3
and properly stigmatized by Moxon as a “make-shift slovenly
contrivance.” The press that he approves and illustrates in
plate 4 is the “excellently improved invention” of Willem Jansen
Blaew, but it received no noteworthy improvement during
the eighteenth century. In all its more important features it
was the press on which Benjamin Franklin worked in Philadelphia
and in London. It is now entirely out of use, and the technical
names of its different parts are imperfectly understood and
are often misapplied. Before study is made of the function of
each part, the novice should understand the combined action of
the different parts.
The form of type to be printed was placed on the bed, or, as it
was then called, the stone (marked l in plate 4). The surface of
the type was inked by dabbing it over with the inking-balls,
which are shown on the left side of the wooden cheek of the
press. The ink was evenly spread over the surface of the balls
by rocking their opposing faces against each other in many directions.
When the type was fairly covered with a film of ink,
the damp sheet to be printed was laid upon the tympan (marked
5 in plate 4, where it is shown in very bad perspective), which
Moxon calls the tinpan. The pressman then folded down the
frisket (marked 6 in the plate and incorrectly drawn), so that it
would lie flat upon the tympan. This frisket had been previously
covered with a sheet of stout paper in which openings had been
cut to allow the face of the types to meet the sheet to be printed.
This mask of paper protected every other part of the sheet against
a possible blackening of ink. The pressman then folded down
the tympan so that it rested flat upon the form of type. This
done, with his left hand on the rounce handle projecting from the
wooden bridge (marked y in plate), he drew the form of type
half way under the platen (marked c in plate), which, it should be
noticed, is one half the size of the stone and of the form of type
upon it (not shown in plate 4). With his right hand on the bar
(marked q in plate) he pulled this bar toward him. This pull
moved downward the screw and its attached spindle (marked i l m
in the plate). The pressure so made, resisted above by the head
e, and below by the winter d, was received by the platen and transferred
to the paper and the types that were directly under the
platen. This pressure printed one half of the sheet. Then the
pressman put back the bar, and with the rounce handle moved
forward the stone with the type upon it until the unprinted half
of the sheet was covered by the platen. This done, he again pulled
down the bar and completed the printing of the unprinted half
of the sheet. Reversing the motion of the rounce handle, he
drew backward the stone and type, unfolded the frisket and tympan,
and removed the sheet that was printed on one side. This
seems, and it really was, slow work; but all books printed before
the year 1800 were made by this slow method. In all presses
made in England before 1800, two pulls of the bar were needed
to print a full sheet on one side. The press was not sufficiently
strong to print properly a full sheet of demy by one impression.
The power produced barely sufficed for the printing of the half-sheet.
The minuteness of the directions here given concerning
the construction and the fitting up of the different parts shows
that rigidity of fitting was regarded as of importance. Yet it was
foreseen that the press would leak pressure.
38. Willem Jansen Blaew, a map-maker and printer of
eminence, was born in Amsterdam in 1571, and died there in
1638. His improvements to the press were made in 1620. As
the Blaew press is now obsolete, I do not think it necessary
to follow Moxon in a more minute explanation of the minor
parts of his press.
Press-building was not a distinct trade in 1683. Every
printer had his presses made to order from his own plans by
a local joiner or carpenter, aided by a blacksmith or machinist.
The bed-plate was of stone, and the platen of wood. Iron
was sparingly used, and only for spindles, hooks, nuts, screws,
bolts, etc., that could not be made of wood. Iron was of high
price, and was cast or forged with so much difficulty that no
one dared think of it as a proper material for the framework
or for any of the larger pieces of the press. The pasting down
of the vellum on the inner side of the tympan (now known as
the drawer) was done to prevent the bagging or bellying outward
of the outer tympan. The brayer of flat face was practically
a wooden pestle. Its office was to distribute the ink on
the block before it was taken up by the balls. This work is
now done much better by a cylinder of wood, which still keeps
the name of brayer.
59, 60. Moxon estimated that one quarter turn of a home
pull of the bar lowered the spindle five eighths of an inch. In
the pressure so given, only one fiftieth of an inch (“the Form
to the Stone half a Scabbord”) was taken by the type, and about
one twelfth of an inch by the paper, tympan, and blankets.
This shows waste of power, even when impression was aided by
an elastic spongy blanket. The greater part of the force exerted
leaked away and was lost in the yielding wood and the compressible
joints. A mechanician will see at a glance that a press so
constructed could not exert more power than the printing of
two octavo pages of type at one impression, and that it would
fail entirely to face the black background of a large woodcut.
68. It does not appear that the stone was tested by a
straight-edge or by a spirit-level. Many of the stone beds in
use during the seventeenth century were uneven as to face and
badly leveled, and compelled the pressman to make use of an
elastic impression. The frequent breaking of the stones complained
of by Moxon was due as much to bad leveling as to the
carelessness of the pressman. His preference for the wood lignum-vitæ
was reasonable.
69. A Platen of Beech-wood was liable to warp and
split, but a more suitable material was rarely used. The only
attempt at improvement known to the writer was made by Christopher
Plantin of Antwerp, who had his platens covered with
sheet copper to cover the cracks in the wood, and to hide the
faults they made in impression.
70. The Points and Point-screws are old devices that
were used in the fifteenth century. One can find the marks of
point-holes in leaves of books printed by Ratdolt and other
careful printers of that period.
72. One of the most useful improvements made by Blaew
in his new press was the provision of leather girths, one end
attached to the carriage, and the other to the barrel around
the spindle. With a rounce handle on the end of this spindle,
the pressman could easily run in and out the carriage with the
type upon it. The first presses did not have this improvement.
It is not to be seen in the woodcuts of the presses of Aldus,
Badius, and other early printers. (Compare the cuts, plates 3
and 4.) It seems that the carriage of the older form of hand-press
must have been shoved in and pulled out by lugging at
the framework of the carriage.
73. The Lye-trough, shown in plate 9, was in use fifty
years ago as a wash-trough. The form of type, laid flat in the
bottom of the trough, was drenched with water by rocking the
trough to and fro.
74. The Paper-bench is now made with an inclined bank
at the end nearest the pressman. This inclination aids him
in seizing the sheet to be printed. On the flat end of the bench
he lays the paper after it has been printed.
The Rack to hang paper on, and the Peel, illustrated in plate
32, are now unknown in many American printing-houses, which
is much to be regretted. The development of printing that has
put the wetting and dry-pressing of paper out of fashion, and
has brought into general use the method of printing on dry
paper against an inelastic impression, is not an unmixed benefit.
The new method has quickened and cheapened common presswork,
and has been of great advantage in the printing of fine
woodcuts, but it has not bettered the presswork of books. The
strong and readable print that was common at the beginning
of this century is now produced with greater difficulty and at
more expense upon dry paper.
75. Concerning Ink. The very minute description here
given of the preparations for making the varnish of ink, which
was badly done then in England and better done in Holland,
should be enough to correct the common belief that the printing-ink
of our predecessors was of better quality than the ink of
our time. It is not necessary for the reader to be an expert to
note that the materials were crude and the processes unscientific.
No test of the quality of the linseed-oil is suggested,
which must have been as uneven then as it is now. Nor is anything
here said concerning the black, which was probably the
crude smoke-black of commerce, with its usual taint of sulphur
and other impurities. The cheap printing-ink of our time, even
when made by a manufacturer of low repute, is more scientifically
compounded, and is blacker and better, than the ink used by the
ordinary book-printer of the seventeenth century. In Moxon’s
book the ink is variable—on many pages pale, on others over-black;
and there are variations of color not entirely due to uneven
inking by the pressman. A weak ink applied to a bold
type, and printed on wet paper against a spongy impression,
seems blacker in print than a better ink printed on dry paper
against an inelastic impression.
Resin was the only ingredient added to the black and varnish.
No mention is made of other substances that are now rated as of
great value.
85. Letter-cutting was always enveloped in mystery.
Every new practitioner had to devise many of his own tools and
work out his own methods, and independent action led some
cutters into serious error. Others, unhampered by traditionary
rules, introduced new methods. Moxon has frankly told us all
about his tools. Some of them may have been invented by himself,
but more of them were those of contemporary English and
Dutch punch-cutters and of the makers of mathematical instruments.
His descriptions of well-known tools like files, rules,
or liners need no comment, but our surprise is aroused at their
simplicity, and more than all, at his ignorance of tools of precision.
Here and there he does mention the magnifying-glass,
but nowhere does he speak of a micrometer. He had no unit as
a base for measurement. He frequently describes a measure as
a half inch, or as a quarter inch, rarely as an eighth inch. A
sixteenth or thirty-second of an inch is never mentioned in these
words. It is a proper inference that his measuring-rule was not
so minutely subdivided. These nicer subdivisions had to be determined
and marked by himself on measuring-rules of his own
construction, and he must have done this work very well. To
divide the body of english in forty-two equal parts is to make each
part equal to about ⁴⁶⁄₁₀₀₀₀ an inch. One forty-second part of
long-primer body would make each part about ³³⁄₁₀₀₀₀ of an inch.
His method of determining the width of these parts was to make,
by rubbing on a stone, seven thin spaces equal to the em quadrat,
or square of the body. The full point or period was one and
one sixth of this thin space; the colon, one and two sixths; the
comma, one and three sixths; the hyphen, one and four sixths;
the semicolon, one and five sixths. These were practically his
testing measures, which were transferred to the plate he called
his face-gauge. The modern punch-cutter will be amazed at the
crudity of Moxon’s tools and methods; but crude as they were,
they served him for making types that did good service. Nor
does Fournier, in his “Manuel Typographique” of 1766, mention
any tool of precision. A testing of distrusted types must have
been done largely by sight and touch.
118. The Swash-letters here mentioned are capitals that
show the writing-master’s flourished extension of line. In many
letters these lines hang over the body, as in the old form of
roman capital Q. They are most common in old italic, and are
fairly illustrated in plate 15.
119. Emerick, emery.
120. Mr. Walberger of Oxford is the Peter Walperger
or Walberger of Holland who was installed by Bishop Fell as
a punch-cutter for the University Press, and who there earned
the reputation of a good workman. He died in 1714.
124. Stem is the thick-stroke of a letter, sometimes called
by type-founders the body-mark.
125. English Letter, as mentioned on this page, means
Old English, or black-letter.
Moxon’s notions of proportion for the variable thickness of
the stems or fat strokes of letters were tabulated by allowing
forty-two equal parts as the height of the body. The thickness
or the width of the stem in a roman capital should be five of
these parts; in an italic capital, four; in lower-case roman, three
and a half; in lower-case italic, three. These distinctions are
nicer than those laid down by Albert Dürer in his diagrams on
the proper proportions of letters, where it is stated that the
width of the stem should be one tenth the height of the body,
which is in the proportion of four and one fifth to forty-two.
These proportions are no longer maintained. The stem is
now made of variable thickness to suit different styles of letter;
sometimes it is in the proportion of two to forty-two, and sometimes
ten to forty-two. The rule that the stem of the roman
capital should be wider than that of the lower-case, and that the
stem of the italic capital should be still thinner, has been generally
observed in all type-foundries.
No defined width is made for the thin-stroke, which is now
called the hair-line; but a glance at the diagrams in plates 11 to
15 is enough to show that this hair-line had a positive and appreciable
width for its height. It was well understood also by
all punch-cutters that this thin-stroke would appear in print
much wider than it did in the punch. The elastic blanket that
forced the wet paper not only upon the type, but lapped it
around its edges, made the thin-stroke appear in print at least
one half wider than it was in the punch or in the type.
129-147, and plates 18 and 19. The type-founder’s mould
is peculiar to his art. It consists of two large pieces of steel,
forming when combined an upper and an under side, so fitted
to each other that types of different widths, from the thinnest
space to the broadest quadrat, can be cast in its central hollow
space without any change in the depth of the body. Each
piece has firmly fixed attachments of many smaller bits of steel
to insure this exact adjustment. Types may have been cast at
a very early date in fixed moulds of sand, but types so made must
have been expensive, of irregular body, and exceedingly variable
in line, and could not have been combined with the accuracy
that is indispensable to the easy practice of type-setting. The
usefulness of typography really depends upon the squareness
and geometrical accuracy of each type. A variation of one
thousandth part of an inch in body is fatal. Early writers on
typography did not clearly describe the mould, but they have put
on record their admiration of the mechanism devised for the
“wonderful art of letter-making,” and the “admirable proportion
and harmony between the letters.” The mechanism that
produced this accuracy was without doubt the mould.
The early type-mould was probably made adjustable in two
directions, so that it could cast two or more bodies of type.
The Bruce foundry of New York has a mould of this description
of unknown age. Its peculiar construction explains slight
variations of body in types of the same face, made by the same
printer during the infancy of the art. This adjustable mould
went out of fashion in the sixteenth century, but it was retained
in many foundries as a mould of value for emergencies.
The mould of fixed body, adjustable as to width only, has always
been preferred.
Fournier says that the early moulds of Germany and Holland
were of brass. Moxon’s mould was of iron. They are now
made of steel, with a precision of fitting unimagined by any
early founder. The most valuable improvement made in this
mould was devised by Archibald Binny of Philadelphia, who,
in 1811, affixed a spring to the matrix that gave to it a quick
return movement after the type had been cast out of the mould.
Many attempts have been made to alter the mould so that it
could cast two or more types at the same time. Didot’s polymatype
mould, made to cast fifty types at one operation, is the
most notable but it can be used only on very small type, and
it is not approved by English or American foundries. The
mould attached to type-casting machines in most use is, in its
more important features, the mould used by Moxon. The new
Barth type-casting machine has a mould of different construction,
but without great change in principle.
135. Geat is the old spelling of the word jet, or the waste
metal that, in cooling, clings to the type at the orifice in which
the hot metal is poured. The separation of this ragged bit of
metal from the cast type is known as “breaking off the jet.”
142. Properly made, the two halves of the mould should fit
so close as to be air-tight; but a too close fitting will not allow
the escape of the air from the mould when the fluid metal is
injected. An imperceptible slackness in fitting is necessary to
allow the escape of the air at the joints. With this escaping
air goes out also, at these joints, a thin feather-edge of cooling
metal, then known as the rag.
The Justifying of the Mould was done without gauges.
The types cast were tested by setting them up in parallel rows,
one row head up, and one row feet up. If one row overlapped
the other, the fault could be felt by a nice touch. The test
of squareness was made by holding two types, nick to nick, between
the eye and light. If a glimmer of light appeared, the
mould was in fault. To the modern founder these seem tests
of great crudity, but they were adjudged good enough.
145. The Dawk was a slight concavity or depression in the
body of the cast type, made by a corresponding convexity in the
mould. For the correction of faults Moxon allows the use of
the file upon the mould with a freedom that must provoke the
surprise of every modern mould-maker. For a modern type-caster
to file a mould after it has been adjusted is now regarded
as a blunder worse than a crime; yet Moxon says that
accuracy need not be expected on the first, or even the seventh,
time of testing. The workman must mend “on, on, on, by a
little at a time, till at last it is so finisht.” The underlaying
of different parts of the mould with an “assidue,” or thin plate
of brass, as is here recommended, is evidence that the mould
was often filed recklessly and to its injury. In no reputable
modern foundry or machine-shop would this tampering with
a mould be allowed. The straight-edge, the square, the eye,
the fingers—these seem to have been the only available tools
of precision.
149. Matrices. Soft copper is recommended because it is
not liable to break the punches; but soft copper is not durable.
Continued spurts of hot metal against a soft copper matrix
soon blunt its edges and finer lines. Modern founders find it
a wiser economy to use hard rolled copper, and risk the breaking
of punches. Very large types are sometimes struck in
copper softened by heat, but this is not regarded as good workmanship.
A matrix made by the electrotype process, or by the
use of a perforated copper plate riveted upon another solid copper
plate, is preferred.
Counters. A thick space, or one third of the square of the
body, is made the proper depth for the sinking of a matrix,
but this depth was not always secured. The fear of breaking
the punch made early founders cautious, and their matrices
were sunk to a depth of one fourth or one fifth the square of
the body. When the counter-punch had been made correspondingly
shallow, the counter of the cast type and the beard outside
the letter were often blackened by the inking-balls, and
dots or spots of ink were transferred with the print to the wet
paper. Fertel, a French printer of 1723, says (“La Science
pratique de l’Imprimerie,” page 4) that the counters of some
new types were of no greater depth than the thickness of a
sheet of strong paper.
153. The Justifying of the Matrices is one of the nice
operations of type-founding. Each matrix must have a free
movement to and from the mould, but it must fit snugly to the
nicest fraction. All the matrices for the same font must occupy
a prescribed position upon the mould, exact as to top, foot,
and sides. A slight deviation puts the types cast therefrom
perceptibly out of line, or makes them crooked, with more space
on one side of the character than on the other. Nor is this all.
The face of the letter in the matrix must be in exact parallel
with the face of the outer plate and the face of the mould. If
higher at one side than at the other, the type cast therefrom
will have a corresponding unevenness of height. If the distance
between the outer surfaces and the faces of the letter is not the
same in all the matrices, the types will be of uneven height.
It is a marvel that early type-founders did so well with their
imperfect methods. The commonest fault was making the
matrix too low, so that the types cast therefrom would be low
to paper. As the remedying of this defect calls for an entire
section on the botching of matrices, it may be inferred that a
certain amount of botching was considered unavoidable. The
press of the early printers seems to have been constructed to
hide irregularities of height in type that were then thought
unavoidable.
164. Making Metal. The melting-point of lead is about
617° and that of iron is about 2100°. At the greater heat lead
is destroyed as a metal. It is possible to incorporate lead with
iron, but it cannot be done by the process here described. The
only useful office performed by the stub-nails was to deprive
the antimony of its excess of sulphur, which was incorporated,
undetected, with the dross and the slag. The proportions are
not clearly stated: “For every three pounds of iron, about five
and twenty pounds of lead.” The exact quantity of antimony
is not stated. In the second paragraph it is said that the iron
and antimony are equal as to weight. Were the ingredients
twenty-five pounds of lead, three of iron, and three of antimony;
or twenty-five pounds of lead, and three pounds of mixed iron
and antimony? No mention is here made of tin or copper.
The lead gave to the alloy softness and easy-working qualities;
the antimony hardness and stiffness; the iron was intended to
give hardness.
169. The Casting of Letters by the hand-mould was slow
work. Four thousand types a day was the average performance.
It was also hard work. To “face the type”—to make
the liquid metal forcibly splash against the face of the matrix—the
caster, as Bernard truly says, must make the contortions of
a maniac. If it were not forcibly splashed, the type would have
a defective face. The jerk or twist given to the arm was one of
skill as well as of strength. It often happened that strong men
were never able to acquire this knack. They might work hard
all day, apparently going through all the motions, and yet be
unable to make perfect types. The smaller the body of the type,
the harder must be the jerk of the arm.
175. Tin. When types did not come with a good face, the
caster put tin in the metal-pot, to make the metal fluid. This is
the only mention of the use of tin as an ingredient, and it seems
to have been used only to lighten the work of the caster.
The Rag, or feather-edge of thin metal made by the windage
or escape of air at the joints, was rubbed off on a grindstone.
This method of rubbing could not be employed for types like
f or j or f, which overhang the body: the rag on these letters
was more slowly taken off with a scraping-knife.
192. The Plowing of a Groove at the bottom of the
type was the next process. No mention is made of an inspection
of the type for the detection of faults of casting, as is customary
in modern type-foundries.
197, 198. Copy. This introduction is obviously the outgrowth
of some painful experiences with authors. “By the
Laws of Printing, a Compositer is strictly to follow his Copy.”
This law presupposes that the copy is always correct—a supposition
as untenable now as it was then. Moxon admits that the
compositor should amend bad spelling and pointing, and use
capitals and italics with sense and reason, even if he has to deviate
from copy. The standard of typographic style is much
higher now. The compositor of to-day who undertook to reset
this book in modern style would be required to cut out all the
italics and more than half the capitals, readjust the punctuation,
correct the spacing, make uniform the spelling, and remodel
the headings and the make-up.
199. Cases. These directions for the papering of the cases
indicate that many were of unseasoned wood or insecurely
jointed. It is not probable that the different parts were dovetailed
or fastened with screws.
201. Washing of Forms. The proper method of washing
a form, as described on this and following pages, warrants the
supposition that very thin ink must have been used, and that
this ink must have flowed or spread downward on the spaces and
quadrats and between the letters in loosely justified lines.
207. Distribution. In these prolix directions concerning
distribution, it seems that a composing-rule was not used to
uphold the type. The compositor made use of a reglet for the
purpose.
212. The Galley here described was a quarto slice-galley,
placed upon the ledge of the upper-case at the right hand, covering
the boxes for signs and double letters, which were the characters
supposed to be in least use. If the galley had been put
in a sliding drawer, upon an inclined shelf under the stand, it
would have been as accessible and not so liable to damage.
212. The Visorum, or projecting copy-holder, is now out
of use. This is to be regretted, for it brought the copy nearer to
the compositor’s eye, enabled him to keep closer attention on
each line of the copy, and afforded readier access to all the
boxes of the upper-case.
214. Reglets. The rude way in which composition was
then done is shown in the second paragraph, in which it is said
that compositors many times used reglets instead of brass composing-rules.
218. Signatures. The compositor was required to make
up his page as soon as it was composed, and to add the direction,
or catch-line, and the signature. The directions for signatures
are minute. It was not enough to put the signature letter A at
the foot of the first page of the first form. It must be repeated
A2 on the third page, as an additional safeguard against the
possible carelessness of the folder. If the section to be bound
consisted of three or more double leaves, the fifth or seventh page
of the section must be appropriately marked with A3 or A4.
When these letters followed in numerical order, the folder knew
that the folding was correct.
As only twenty-three letters in the alphabet were accepted for
signatures (J, U, and W were rejected), the letters could serve
only for twenty-three signatures, usually of eight, and never
more than sixteen pages. If the book exceeded three hundred
and sixty-eight pages, and sometimes a lower number, the alphabet
was doubled as Aa. If the book had two or more volumes,
the number of the volume had to be added to the signatures.
This old method of the trade is still observed in Great
Britain. In the United States Arabic figures are preferred for
signatures.
The signature was put unhandily in the center of the line,
making it difficult to be seen by gatherer or collator. Modern
usage now requires that the signature be more conveniently
placed for inspection, near the beginning of the white line. A
recent fashion is to put the signature near the edge of the tail,
so that it can be cut off by the binder. Another fad is to suppress
all signatures. This is recommended because signatures
are not now found in early manuscripts, but Blades has shown
in his essay on this subject that they were always used by all
writers of manuscript books, and that they do not show because
they were put at the foot of the page and were afterward trimmed
off in binding.
220. Emphasis. The remarks in the fifth paragraph place
Moxon before us as a man who had his heart in his trade.
The duty of a compositor, “to make the meaning of his Author
intelligent to the Reader,” and “his Work shew graceful to the
Eye, and pleasant in Reading,” is pointedly stated. His methods
were well adapted for the time and for prevailing typographic
fashions. He confesses that the “mode of ordering
Titles varies; as may be seen by comparing the Title Pages of
every twenty years: Therefore a Lasting Rule cannot be given
for the ordering them: only what has been said in general concerning
Emphasis.” To suit the taste of that time, print must
have emphasis, and plenty of it. Every page was peppered with
italic; important nouns and verbs and some that are not important
must begin with a capital. For the title-page and the running
title roman capitals were not bold or black enough. Recourse
was had to black-letter. That there was some system, or
attempt at system, in this conglomerate of styles is probable, but
Moxon has not explained his rules. We know only that the
style of this book is not uniform. A proof-reader of our time
who attempted to make it uniform would score every page.
The fashion of displaying print with italic and capital letters
died hard. More than a hundred years passed before readers
discovered that too much emphasis in the text defeated its purpose,
and made the text really harder to be read. Not even yet
are all publishers and printers able to see that there should be
a difference in the treatment of a poster to be read across the
street and of a title-page to be held in the hand; and that there
is but little more reason for classifying some words of a title in
bold display-lines, and others in petty catch-lines of obscure
small capitals, than there would be in treating the words of a
sentence in the text in a similar manner.
The uncouthness of many of the titles of the seventeenth century
is wrongly supposed by some critics to show the vanity of
the printer, who wished to display, as well as he could, the extent
of his collection. This supposition has no good foundation. The
printer of that time did not have types enough for the needs of
title-pages. Between pica and canon were only six distinct
bodies and faces of roman letter, and they were rarely of uniform
face. There should have been at least a dozen. These
types were inelastic, and could not be neatly compressed or expanded
to fit the words of every line. The prominent word or
words selected by the author for a leading line might be too
few or too many to fill that line. All the printer could do was
to space out the letters of a short line, or divide words in the
over-long line and put them in two lines. The words had to be
accommodated to the type. It was for this reason that large
roman lower-case, black-letter, and italic were so freely used.
Moxon showed good sense in his preference for capital letters,
for “Capitals express Dignity where-ever they are Set, and Space
and Distance also implies stateliness.” Capitals were then made
to one square standard form, and were really unfit for more than
half the title-pages for which they had to be used. The variety
of large roman capitals provided by modern type-founders is
better now than it was two centuries ago, yet it is still imperfect.
We have a greater variety of roman faces and more sizes,
but not one of them is properly graduated in the larger bodies,
as they should be, by a difference of three points only.
The mechanical directions concerning petty details of composition
seem needlessly minute, but most of them are good, and
are obeyed to this day.
232. Of Imposing. As the sheet to be printed in 1683 was
always of small size, imposing was a comparatively simple process.
But four foldings were made,—folio, quarto, octavo, and
twelves,—all of them clearly illustrated by the plates. Some of
the simple rules that our author lays down have been unwisely
omitted in some modern printers’ grammars, viz: An even and
an odd page always stand together; the folios of the two pages
that stand together make, in their addition, one more than the
number of pages in that form.
238. Planing Down. The instruction about this duty is
needed more now than it was then. Our author recommends
that projecting type be planed down with knocks on the planer
from the closed fist, or with the head of the shooting-stick.
Our larger forms require more force, but too much force is
often given. The pounding of a form after it has been locked-up
with furious blows from a heavy mallet is not warranted.
239. Locking-up. His process of locking-up is not so
good. He advises the tightening of each page by the side-stick
before that page is tightened at the foot. This indicates
the commonness of slack spacing and line justification, for
which he suggests the remedy of chewed paper forced into the
slack line at the point of a bodkin! He confesses, however,
that this is a botchy expedient. The frequent hanging or inward
bowing of a page at its foot is usually produced by over-tight
locking-up of the page at the side before locking-up the foot.
242. Correcting. As proofs could not be taken on galleys,
all correction had to be done on the stone, and this was done as
it is now, with the destructive bodkin. Unusual tolerance seems
to have been given to the practice of overrunning matter in the
form—a practice sure to make bad justification.
260. Of the Corrector and his Office. Moxon requires
the corrector to be well skilled in “Latin, Greek, Hebrew,
Syriack, Caldæ, French, Spanish, Italian, High Dutch,
Saxon, Low Dutch, Welch, &c.” Nor is this all. “He ought to be
very knowing in Derivations and Etymologies of Words, very
sagacious in Pointing, skilful in the Compositers whole Task
and Obligation, and endowed with a quick Eye to espy the smallest
Fault.” One may rightfully doubt that any reader permanently
employed by any master-printer of the old time had one
half of these accomplishments. Moxon’s ideal of a corrector
seems to have been based on the tradition that learned men
had been employed by Christopher Plantin of Antwerp, and
the Stephens of Paris. His error was that he mistook their
principal duty, which was not so much to correct errors in
proof as to prepare copy after its diligent collation with earlier
editions or little-known manuscripts of merit. Scholarly work
was cheap. Plantin paid his principal correctors lower wages
than his compositors. That these correctors did a deal of scholarly
work is not to be questioned, yet they overlooked many
typographical errors. The scholarly preparer of copy and the
editorial and critical proof-reader of the sixteenth and seventeenth
centuries are now extinct. No living master-printer can
afford to pay for the services of even a presuming successor
to any one of these worthies. He has to be content with the
proof-reader who is “very knowing in Derivations and Etymologies,
and sagacious in Pointing.”
The signs or marks then used for the correction of proof
are fewer in number, but are substantially the same as those in
use now.
266. Alterations. The admonition to the author to deliver
his copy perfect, and not to hope that he can mend it in
proof without additional expense, is an intimation that badly
prepared copy is quite as old as printing.
270. The Fitting of the old Hand-press. This section
gives us a curious insight into the defects of the early hand-press.
The smearing of tenons with soap or grease; the bracing
up of the cheeks, head, and cap, with beams; “the crazy make
of the Winter,” or the resist to downward impression; “the Under-laying
of the Feet”—all these make one doubt whether this
press was really “invented upon mature consideration of Mechanick
Powers, deducted from Geometrick Principles.”
275. The Bedding of the Stone as here described was in
bran, but plaster of Paris was sometimes used.
The pouring of water from a sponge on the face of the stone,
to see whether it had a “propensitude” for one side more than
the other, was the substitute for a spirit-level.
278. Of Hanging the Platen. The platen was suspended
by whip-cords from hooks. The spindle was steadied in its action
by the guide-rods attached to the hose. The adjustment
of the whip-cords to the hose, so that they would not be unevenly
strained when the spindle descended, was a nice operation that
was not always done with accuracy. When unevenly hung the
platen gave untrue impression.
281. Justifying the Head, as here described, was the
repacking of the mortises with felt, pasteboard, and scabbard,
so that the resist to the impression should be uniform. The
mechanic who carefully reads these descriptions of the construction
and operation of the press must wonder at the ingenuity of
these cross-purposes. The press was made to give impression
upon the paper overlying the types, and it must have been intended
that the pressure exerted should be confined almost exclusively
to the form of types. It should have been rigid and
inflexible in every part where pressure might be lost. But we
here see that provision was made in the beginning for the escape
of the force exerted. Not one tenth of it was felt upon the type.
Nine tenths of that force leaked out in the fittings, and really
contributed to the needless wearing of elastic or shackly-fitted
parts of the press. In important joints one finds elasticity
where there should have been rigidity, as well as compressibility
in the bed of bran under the stone, in the loosely tenoned
head and winter, and in the swinging platen.
287. Additional elasticity was given by the use of a blanket
in two folds, or a doubled blanket.
288. Making Register. The rude manner in which forms
were sent to press is here shown by the directions to the pressman
to correct them when out of register from half a nonpareil to
a long-primer! He is ordered first to unlock the form and try
to get the pages in register by changing the quoins, or by varying
the pressure on them, which frequently produced a twisting of
the cross-bars. If this expedient did not serve, then the pressman
must put in or take out furniture until the pages were in
parallel. This was bad practice. The proper usage now is for
the pressman to return a crooked form to the compositor, and
require him to make the change. Alterations of margins in
crooked type-forms should be made on the imposing-stone, and
not on the bed of the press.
291. The Underlaying of wood letters or engravings of
any kind that are too low to receive impression is here made
another duty of the compositor; but the underlaying or overlaying
of types in masses or in patches to correct inequalities of
impression is nowhere advised. The spongy blankets were the
first and last resort for the correction of this fault.
319. Working at Press. Two pressmen were needed for
its efficient service: one to ink the type, one to put on the sheet,
print it, and take it from the tympan. It was intended that they
should be of equal ability, so that they could do either kind of
work. The proper product of the press so manned was put at
the high standard of a token an hour, or two hundred and forty
sheets printed on one side. The work-day was never less than
twelve hours, sometimes more. The press was of small size, yet
it required much activity to pull a token in one hour, for two
pulls of the bar had to be made on each side of the sheet. In the
middle of every ream the paper-maker put a cross slip of white
paper as a mark or token that at this point one half-ream ended
and the other half-ream began. Printers of our time continue
the use of the word token as a measure of their work. The full
ream printed on both sides is rated as four tokens.
Composition Inking-rollers came in with cylinder printing-machines.
The success of the new machines depended on the
rollers. According to Hansard, they were first made by Forster
of Weybridge, England, who derived his knowledge of the value
of a mixture of glue and molasses as a receiver and transferrer
of ink from the Staffordshire potteries, where it was used as an
aid in the decoration of crockery.
The first printer in the United States to use composition rollers
was Jonas Booth of New York, who made them in 1827.
328. Printing in Red. This paragraph 16 requires careful
reading for a clear understanding of the crudity of the old method
of printing in red and black. The pressman unlocked the form
and picked out all words to be printed in red, filling up the vacant
spaces with quadrats. He then printed the black form in the
usual way. This done, he again unlocked the form and withdrew
the quadrats that had been used to fill the spaces to be
occupied by the words in red. At the bottom of each vacated
space he put in bits of scabbard as underlays for the types in
red. The thickness of the scabbards is not specified, but it
must be understood that they projected a nonpareil or more
above other types. The form was then locked up, the red words
being in their proper places. A new frisket was cut for this red
form, and the red ink was beaten only on the types for red ink
that projected above their mates. If the inking-balls slipped
and inked any other part of the form, the sheet was protected
from smear by the new frisket that admitted through it only
the types intended for red. This treatment secured exact register
(provided the paper had not shrunk in drying), but the
rudely cut scabbards were an uncertain and variable support
for the types, and usually made uneven printing. The caution
to pull lightly and not print too hard was needed, for the difficulty
of fairly inking and smoothly printing types so treated
cannot be overrated.
331. Printing in Gold. Equally unworkmanlike, to our
notion, are the directions about printing names in gold and
silver. For this neither chase nor press was provided. The
type as set in the stick was coated with hard varnish, and then
pressed with the hands on wet paper against a blanket on the
correcting-stone. This done, the gold or silver leaf was gently
pressed on the print!
356. The Chapel. The common belief that the word
“chapel” as the trade name of an association of printers in a
printing-house is as old as Caxton, and that it was so given
from a chapel attached to “the almonesrye at the reed pale”
in Westminster Abbey, in or near which Caxton did his work,
finds no warrant from Moxon. His explanation is more reasonable:
“... some great Churchman, or men, ... for the Books
of Divinity that proceeded from a Printing-house, gave it the
Reverend Title of Chappel.” I find no mention in any book
of earlier date of the word chapel as a synonym for a fraternity
of printers. Although England is regarded as the birthplace
of guilds and fraternities, there is no old record of any association
of printers as printers only. The Company of Stationers
was an association dominated by booksellers who were more intent
on getting and holding patents and privileges for the sale
of books than on improving or developing typography. Roger
L’Estrange, the “surveyor of the Imprimerys,” writing in 1663,
said: “The stationers have subjected the Printers to be absolutely
their slaves by so increasing their number that one half
must either play the knave or starve.” The customs of the
chapel among journeymen probably came from Germany.
Blades, in his “Depositio Cornuti Typographici” (London, 1885),
shows that some of the customs of English printers closely resemble
the older German customs that are fully described in
this curious book.
Thomas Gent, printer, in his “Autobiography” (page 16, edition
of 1832), thus describes his initiation in a London printing-house
about the year 1714: “On my entrance amongst a number
of men, besides paying what is called Ben-money [benvenue], I
found, soon after, I was, as it were, to be dubbed as great a cuz
as the famous Don Quixote ... though the insipid folly thereof,
agreeably to their strange harangues in praise of the protecting
charms of cuzship ... was not very agreeable to my hearing;
yet, when the master himself insisted it must be done, I was
obliged to submit to that immemorial custom, the origin of
which they could not then explain to me. It commenced by
walking round the chapel, (Printing rooms being called such,
because first begun to be practised in one at Westminster
Abbey;) singing an alphabetical anthem, tuned literally to the
vowels; striking me, kneeling, with a broadsword; and pouring
ale upon my head; my titles were exhibited much to this effect,
‘Thomas Gent, baron of College Green, earl of Fingall, with
power to the limits of Dublin bar, captain general of the
Teagues near the Lake of Allen, and lord high admiral over all
the bogs in Ireland.’ To confirm which, and that I might not
pay over again for the same ceremony, through forgetfulness,
they allowed me godfathers, the first I ever had before, because
the Presbyterian minister, at my christening, allowed none at
his office; and these, my new pious fathers, ... were the unreverend
Mr. Holt and Mr. Palmer. Nay, there were witnesses
also, such as Mr. Fleming, Mr. Gibbins, and Mr. Cocket, stanch
journeymen printers.”
In some printing-houses the jocularity and horse-play of the
chapel meetings led to drunken revelries and a neglect of business
that became intolerable. The chapel undertook to decide
who was a fair workman and who was not. The fairness or unfairness
of the workman was determined by his compliance or
non-compliance with the rule of an irresponsible chapel. In
1820 the master-printers of London were almost unanimous in
opposing the chapel. Hansard says (“Typographia,” pages 309,
310) that in most houses it was abolished.
Few of the old customs survive in America. The benvenue
and the solaces are unknown even by name to the majority of
journeymen compositors. The word chapel is still used: it
defines an assembly of workmen in a composing-room who are
members of a Typographical Union.
361. Way-goose. Hansard (“Typographia,” foot-note, page
305) quotes Bailey’s dictionary for the definition of the word:
“Wayz-Goose, a stubble-goose, an entertainment given to journeymen
at the beginning of winter.” Wayz is the old English
word for stubble. A wayz-goose was a known dainty, and the
head dish at the annual feasts of the forefathers of our fraternity.
363. The Company of Stationers is an old fraternity. Long
before printing had been invented, the copyists, text-writers, and
makers of devotional books of low price, like the Creed, Pater
Noster, Ave Maria, etc., were associated, and sold their books in
or near those streets of London that still retain the names of
Pater Noster Lane, Ave Maria Lane, and Amen Corner. In the
year 1403 they were formed into a guild and governed by a
master and two wardens. In 1553 they owned and occupied
a large hall near St. Paul’s Church, which was burned in the
great fire of 1666. A new hall was built, and finished in 1670.
Hansard shows in his “Typographia” (facing page 237) a print
of the building as it then appeared, in which the festivities
described by Moxon were celebrated.
Transcriber’s Notes.
Cover art created for this eBook is granted to the public domain.